Materials
Lg K Guard

KGuard

Overview

This comprehensive video series delves into advanced Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu (BJJ) techniques, focusing on open guard and K guard offense and defense. It covers a variety of guard positions such as K Guard, De La Riva, Reverse De La Riva, waiter position, and transitions to advanced positions like 70/30, backside 50/50, and Barambolo. Key themes include maintaining proper outside leg positioning, grip, and posture control (both gi and no gi), leg entanglements, and guard retention. Techniques for inverting, maintaining pressure, framing, and controlling the opponent's shoulder and leg positions are detailed. Defensive strategies against common counters like leg drags and foot locks, and troubleshooting scenarios are also provided. The series emphasizes the importance of building a cohesive guard game and adjusting techniques to fit different body types and opponent sizes.

Key Points

  • Gaining control with K-Guard emphasizes performing a hip escape to move the hips away and placing the foot just past the opponent's hip.
  • Effective pummeling for K-Guard involves shrugging the opponent’s arms and ensuring your arm and leg positioning to maintain optimal control.
  • Combatting sprawl and pressure includes lifting the opponent's hips and using a "shoulder roll" when they sit back to prevent dynamic entries.
  • Utilizing De La Riva and Reverse De La Riva focuses on transitioning smoothly between grips and hooks to create instability in your opponent.
  • Managing combat base posture requires using strong frames and precise foot positioning to control opponents stepping into combat base.
  • Executing shallow K-Guard attacks involves attacking from shallow K-Guard by stepping the foot behind the knee or moving towards a full K-Guard setup.
  • Handling opponents standing and running includes keeping the knee low and back to avoid opponent’s attempts to sprawl or push your legs away.
  • Pummeling techniques and troubleshooting involve pummeling both legs in various scenarios and clearing limbs that impede movement.
  • Off-balancing and controlling opponents requires using your hands and legs to pull the opponent’s knee onto the stomach.
  • Defending and countering submissions includes managing foot lock threats by stepping on the opponent’s hips and controlling their ability to bridge.

Video Sections

details

Technique Catalog

details

1. K Guard to Backside 50/50 Heel Hook (Kneeling Opponent) (opens in a new tab)

a. Starting Position: Closed Guard or Open Guard with opponent kneeling.

b. Steps:

  1. Closed Guard: Frame shoulders, get knees in front, prevent retreat. Hip out to the side, reach under opponent's leg, maintain frames with knee underneath, attach to leg for K guard.
  2. Open Guard: Secure a two-on-one grip on opponent's arm, hip out to the side, place foot past hip with knee down, pummel foot under armpit, reach under leg, pull knee up to stomach.
  3. Ensure opponent's knee is turned inwards, exposing back of knee.
  4. Swing your leg over the top, threading it deep.
  5. Force opponent's knee to the ground by straightening your K Guard leg.
  6. Lock feet in a triangle, back heel tightly.
  7. Lift opponent's foot up and away, pulling your top leg back towards you for control.
  8. Turn side-on, bring elbow to toes, pull toes back towards your ribs.
  9. Capture the heel and connect your hands.
  10. Finish by bridging with upper body first, then bringing hips in.

c. Key Points:

  • Maintain strong frames to prevent cross-face and sprawls.
  • Keep your knee underneath opponent's leg to prevent escapes.
  • Pull opponent's weight forward using your top leg hook.
  • Ensure knee is turned inwards before attempting backside 50/50.
  • Keep your K guard leg straight when chopping over the top.
  • Secure a tight grip to prevent opponent from freeing their knee.

d. Counters:

  • Opponent backsteps: Retract your knee and place foot in front of their stomach to maintain control.
  • Opponent frees their knee: Attempt to salvage the heel hook or transition to crab ride.

2. K Guard to X-Guard Sweep (Standing Opponent) (opens in a new tab)

a. Starting Position: K Guard with opponent standing.

b. Steps:

  1. If opponent's knee is turned out, secure a torsion grip at their elbow to rotate the knee inwards.
  2. Turn your hips in towards your opponent, back heel against their calf to scoot underneath.
  3. Flare your leg out as you scoot under, keeping your knee behind their hamstring.
  4. Rotate your body to face outwards, using the torsion grip and knee pressure to force opponent's hands to the mat.
  5. Establish X-Guard, maintaining a strong grip on opponent's leg.
  6. Push away with your legs, retracting your top leg and getting up on your hand.
  7. Push opponent's knee downwards as you stand, leveraging your shoulder for control.
  8. Finish with a technical stand-up or by pulling opponent down and taking their back.

c. Key Points:

  • Aim to get your hips underneath opponent's body.
  • Use a strong back heel to scoot under and rotate.
  • Keep your knee underneath opponent's leg for leverage.
  • Force opponent's hands to the mat with the torsion grip and knee pressure.
  • Maintain a strong grip as you stand to prevent escapes.

d. Counters:

  • Opponent controls the far leg: Pummel your foot under their armpit or transition to backside 50/50.
  • Opponent pushes both legs away: Use their momentum to throw them forward and get up on your hand.

3. K Guard to 70/30 (Kneeling Opponent - Knee Turned Outwards) (opens in a new tab)

a. Starting Position: K Guard with opponent kneeling and knee turned outwards.

b. Steps:

  1. Support opponent's knee with your K Guard hook, preventing them from retracting.
  2. Elevate opponent's leg by stretching it upwards, securing an overhook for control.
  3. Pass opponent's leg across your body, maintaining a tight grip.
  4. Sit up into the 70/30 position, adjusting your grip if needed.

c. Key Points:

  • Support opponent's knee to prevent them from retracting.
  • Elevate the leg to increase control and prevent escapes.
  • Secure a tight overhook before passing the leg across.
  • Sit up into the 70/30 position for further attacks.

d. Counters:

  • Opponent attempts to free their leg: Sit up quickly, re-establish your hook and secure the overhook.

4. 70/30 to Backside 50/50 Heel Hook (opens in a new tab)

a. Starting Position: 70/30 position.

b. Steps:

  1. Move your hips out to the side, exposing the back of opponent's knee.
  2. Bring opponent's foot high into your armpit, keeping their leg stretched.
  3. Curl your head inwards and lift your elbow upwards for a secure grip.
  4. Swing your hips up and over, threading your leg deep.
  5. Step on opponent's leg to maintain control and extension.
  6. Extend your leg through, forcing the heel to be exposed.
  7. Capture the heel and finish the submission.

c. Key Points:

  • Expose the back of the knee by moving your hips outwards.
  • Ensure opponent's foot is high in your armpit for leverage.
  • Keep opponent's leg stretched to prevent escapes.
  • Use a combination of hip movement and leg extension to expose the heel.

5. Shallow K Guard to Backside 50/50 (opens in a new tab)

a. Starting Position: Shallow K Guard.

b. Steps:

  1. Secure a tight grip on opponent's leg, preventing them from freeing their knee.
  2. Turn opponent's knee inwards, exposing the back of the knee.
  3. Swing your hips upwards and chop your leg over the top, forcing opponent's knee to the ground.
  4. Transition to backside 50/50 and attack the heel hook.

c. Key Points:

  • Maintain a tight grip to prevent opponent from running.
  • Ensure opponent's knee is turned inwards before chopping over.
  • Swing your hips upwards for maximum leverage and control.
  • Force the knee to the ground with your leg chop.

6. K Guard to Close Guard Sweep/Armlock (opens in a new tab)

a. Starting Position: K Guard with opponent kneeling and arm exposed (reaching for head or out of position).

b. Steps:

  1. Grip opponent's tricep with your bottom hand.
  2. Shoot your hips upwards, collecting their head with your top knee.
  3. Swivel on your K Guard leg, bringing your hips out to the side.
  4. Secure an overhook on opponent's arm, pulling their elbow open.
  5. Use your top leg to trap opponent's head, preventing them from posturing.
  6. Kick opponent's elbow away with your bottom leg and simultaneously move your hips out to the left.
  7. This motion chops your leg across their neck, setting up the triangle.
  8. From the triangle, transition to closed guard by bringing your top leg high and shooting your bottom leg through to the hip.
  9. Maintain control of the opponent's leg and use it to attack an armbar or sweep.
  10. If opponent posts their arm to defend the sweep, trap the tricep and attack a straight armbar.
  11. If opponent frees their arm, push it inwards and attempt a back take.

c. Key Points:

  • Capitalize on opponent's exposed arm during K Guard entry.
  • Quickly secure the head and tricep control.
  • Use your legs to effectively transition to a strong closed guard position.
  • Maintain control of opponent's leg to set up various attacks.

7. Shallow K Guard to X-Guard (Standing Opponent) (opens in a new tab)

a. Starting Position: Shallow K Guard with opponent standing.

b. Steps:

  1. Ensure good pummeling and control, preventing opponent from pushing your leg off.
  2. Turn your hips inwards, facing your opponent's far leg.
  3. Hook the back of their calf with your bottom leg.
  4. Scoot your hips underneath their body, maintaining the hook.
  5. Rotate your body to face outwards, bringing your knee behind their hamstring.
  6. Use the torsion grip and knee pressure to force opponent's hands to the mat, establishing X-Guard.

c. Key Points:

  • Pummel effectively to prevent opponent from controlling your legs.
  • Turn your hips inwards and secure a deep hook on the calf.
  • Use a strong back heel to drive your hips underneath the opponent.
  • Combine the torsion grip and knee pressure to break opponent's posture and establish X-Guard.

8. Troubleshooting and Retention (opens in a new tab)

a. Opponent controls far leg:

  • Pummel foot under armpit or transition to backside 50/50.
  • If opponent stands tall with feet together, grip both knees, pummel your leg inside, bring your hips high, and chop behind opponent's legs for a sweep or 50/50 entry.

b. Opponent pushes both legs away:

  • Keep one leg retracted to prevent opponent from controlling both.
  • If pushed forward, use momentum for a "slam dunk" with your legs, get up on your hand, and counter.

c. Opponent pushes K Guard leg away:

  • Use your secondary leg to get under opponent's armpit.
  • Retract your knee and circle back to the hip.
  • If opponent overcommits, chop over the back of their knee for backside 50/50 or back attack.

d. Opponent attempts to run:

  • Close the gap between your hands and chest quickly.
  • Drop your top leg down or shoot it under opponent's armpit.
  • Maintain a tight grip to prevent them from fully disengaging.

e. Opponent drops low and scoots away:

  • Push opponent's foot to the inside, maintain your hook, and swing your leg over for a counter attack.

f. Opponent underhooks your leg and lifts:

  • Keep your knee jammed under their thigh to prevent the lift.
  • If they get under, use your top leg to push their shoulder and clear the space for your knee to return underneath.

g. Opponent reaches under your leg from standing:

  • Step on their torso or kick your leg straight to strip their grip.

h. Opponent attempts a leg drag:

  • Keep your knee tight to your chest, making it difficult to pull away.
  • If they secure a leg drag, spin towards north-south, pummel your leg back, and regain control.

i. Opponent attempts a duck under:

  • Keep your inside leg low, preventing them from getting into the space.
  • Kick your top leg through to strip their grip and hook the far side of their ribs.

j. Defending footlocks:

  • Always have your K Guard leg ready to step onto the opponent's stomach near their hips to prevent bridging and generate push-pull power.
  • Keep your knee line below the line of their knee to avoid heel hook vulnerability.

k. Countering crab ride entries:

  • Pummel your top leg inside, preventing the opponent from getting under your free leg.
  • If they do secure a crab ride entry, look to take the K Guard leg across your body to prevent back takes and set up counter attacks.

9. Additional Notes

  • The transcript frequently emphasizes the importance of pummeling effectively and maintaining strong frames to prevent opponent's counters.
  • Flexibility is important for many of the inverting movements, and viewers are encouraged to stretch properly beforehand.
  • Lachlan Giles stresses the interconnectedness of the different guard positions and encourages viewers to develop a congruent game that flows seamlessly between them.

10. De La Riva Concepts and Attacks (opens in a new tab)

a. Starting Position: De La Riva is an open guard characterized by a hook around the opponent's leg at or below the knee, with the foot typically placed near their hip.

b. Key Concepts:

  1. Off-Balancing: The fundamental principle of De La Riva is to off-balance the opponent towards their hooked leg, creating opportunities for sweeps, back takes, and transitions.
  2. Angle and Movement: Constantly adjusting your angle and moving around the opponent disrupts their base and prevents them from establishing a solid passing strategy.
  3. Footwork and Pummeling: Precise footwork and efficient pummeling are crucial for maintaining control, preventing counters, and transitioning to other positions.
  4. Hip Mobility and Flexibility: De La Riva relies heavily on hip mobility and flexibility to execute sweeps, inversions, and transitions smoothly.

c. Primary Attacks:

  1. Back Take: Off-balance the opponent by pulling on their hooked leg, scoot around their back, secure a second hook, and transition to back control.
  2. Berimbolo: As the opponent steps to regain their balance, knock their hips to the mat and execute a berimbolo to take their back.
  3. Waiter Position: If the opponent circles away to prevent the back take, trap their leg, transition to a modified X-Guard, and sweep them to establish a dominant top position.

d. Entry Points:

  1. Direct Entry: Against a standing opponent, reach for their knee, hook it with your inside leg, and place your other foot near their hip.
  2. From Guard Retention: As the opponent attempts to pass, secure a grip on their leg and transition into De La Riva to regain control and initiate offense.
  3. From K Guard: If the opponent defends against K Guard by turning their knee outwards, switch to De La Riva to attack from a different angle.
  4. From Reverse De La Riva: If the opponent attempts a knee cut pass, secure a reverse De La Riva hook, then transition to De La Riva with their leg elevated for a stronger attacking position.

11. Reverse De La Riva Concepts and Attacks (opens in a new tab)

a. Starting Position: Reverse De La Riva is a less commonly used open guard where the inside leg hooks the opponent's leg at or below the knee. It primarily serves as a reaction to specific passes rather than a primary guard.

b. Key Concepts:

  1. Reacting to Knee Cut: Reverse De La Riva is most effective as a response to the opponent's attempt to pass with a knee cut.
  2. Transitioning to Outside Positions: The primary goal from Reverse De La Riva is to transition to more advantageous outside positions, like K Guard or De La Riva.
  3. Limiting Opponent's Options: Reverse De La Riva controls the opponent's leg and disrupts their base, making it difficult for them to pass effectively.

c. Primary Attacks:

  1. Returning to De La Riva: Clear your inside hook and transition back to a standard De La Riva position for stronger offensive options.
  2. Transitioning to K Guard: Secure a grip on the opponent's leg, scoot your hips to the center, and rotate to establish K Guard on either the near or far leg.
  3. Modified X-Guard Sweep: If the opponent steps forward, trap their leg, transition to a modified X-Guard, and sweep them to a dominant top position.
  4. Invert and Spin Under: As the opponent attempts to control your upper body, invert underneath their legs, come out their back, and transition to a standing crab ride position for a back take.

d. Entry Points:

  1. Reaction to Knee Cut: When the opponent attempts a knee cut pass, immediately hook their leg with your inside leg to establish Reverse De La Riva.

12. Waiter Position Concepts and Attacks (opens in a new tab)

a. Starting Position: The Waiter Position is a transitional guard often reached from De La Riva where you underhook the opponent's far leg while controlling their near leg with your other foot.

b. Key Concepts:

  1. Underhooking the Far Leg: The underhook on the far leg is the defining characteristic of the Waiter Position, providing significant control and leverage.
  2. Off-Balancing and Control: Maintaining pressure on the underhooked leg disrupts the opponent's base and makes them vulnerable to sweeps and back takes.
  3. Transitioning to Leg Entanglements: Waiter is a gateway to leg entanglements like X-Guard, Single Leg X-Guard, and 70/30.

c. Primary Attacks:

  1. Leg Entanglements: Transition to Single Leg X-Guard, X-Guard, or 70/30 by passing the underhooked leg across your body, opening up opportunities for leg locks and sweeps.
  2. Back Take: Leverage the underhook to spin underneath the opponent, come out their back, and secure a dominant position for a back take.

d. Entry Points:

  1. From De La Riva: As the opponent drops their knee to defend the De La Riva sweep or back take, reach for their far leg with an underhook, swing your hips back, and establish the Waiter Position.

13. Single Leg X-Guard and X-Guard Concepts and Attacks (opens in a new tab)

a. Starting Position: Single Leg X-Guard involves trapping the opponent's leg between your legs, typically with an overhook on their near leg and your foot hooked behind their knee. X-Guard is a more secure leg entanglement where your legs form an "X" shape with the opponent's, involving hooking their far leg with your foot and securing an underhook on the same leg with your arm.

b. Key Concepts:

  1. Leg Control and Leverage: Both positions emphasize controlling the opponent's leg to disrupt their base and create opportunities for sweeps and submissions.
  2. Off-Balancing: Pulling and pushing on the opponent's leg manipulates their weight distribution, making them vulnerable to sweeps and transitions.
  3. Transitioning and Upgrading: Single Leg X-Guard often serves as a stepping stone to the more stable X-Guard, opening up a wider range of attacks.

c. Primary Attacks:

  1. Sweeps: Utilize leg leverage and off-balancing techniques to sweep the opponent to the mat, achieving a dominant top position.
  2. Back Takes: By isolating and controlling the opponent's leg, you can create opportunities to spin underneath them and take their back.
  3. Lumbar Jack Sweep: From X-Guard, tilt the opponent backwards, driving their weight onto their shoulders, and sweep them to the side.
  4. Leg Locks: 50/50 and 70/30 positions are readily accessible from both Single Leg X-Guard and X-Guard, leading to various leg lock submissions.

d. Entry Points:

  1. From Waiter: When the opponent drops their knee in response to the Waiter Position, trap their leg and transition to Single Leg X-Guard or X-Guard depending on your grip and angle.
  2. From K Guard: If the opponent turns their knee outwards in K Guard, you can scoot underneath and establish either Single Leg X-Guard or X-Guard.
  3. From Reverse De La Riva: If the opponent attempts to control your upper body in Reverse De La Riva, you can extend their leg and transition to X-Guard, setting up sweeps or back takes.

14. 50/50 and 70/30 Concepts and Attacks (opens in a new tab)

a. Starting Position: 50/50 involves both your legs and the opponent's legs interlocked, creating a 50/50 sharing of control. 70/30 involves you controlling the opponent's leg, typically by threading it across your body, while maintaining a hook with your other leg.

b. Key Concepts:

  1. Leg Control and Exposure: Both positions revolve around controlling the opponent's leg and exposing their heel for leg lock attacks.
  2. Hip Movement and Angle: Adjusting your hip position and angle is crucial for maximizing leverage and preventing counters.
  3. Transitioning to Back Takes: 70/30 offers safe and effective transitions to back control, increasing your offensive options.

c. Primary Attacks:

  1. Heel Hook: From 50/50, isolate and expose the opponent's heel, securing a tight grip and applying pressure for a heel hook submission.
  2. Back Take: From 70/30, spin underneath the opponent, come out their back, and secure hooks for a back take.
  3. Sweeps: Utilize leg leverage and hip movement to sweep the opponent and gain top position.

d. Entry Points:

  1. From K Guard: Enter backside 50/50 by chopping the opponent's knee to the ground. Transition to 70/30 by passing their leg across your body.
  2. From Reverse De La Riva: Invert under the opponent's legs, fold your top leg across, and transition to a K Guard entry that can lead to either 50/50 or 70/30.
  3. From Single Leg X-Guard/X-Guard: Isolate the opponent's leg and pass it across your body to achieve 70/30.

15. Finishing Positions (opens in a new tab)

a. Backside 50/50:

  • Primary finish: Inside Heel Hook

b. Standing Crab Ride:

  • Primary objective: Pull the opponent down and take their back

c. Berimbolo:

  • Primary objective: Knock the opponent's hips to the mat and secure back control

d. Prone Armbar (Choibar/Gedbar):

  • Primary objective: Kick the opponent's leg out and attack their arm with a straight armbar

16. Inversions (opens in a new tab)

a. Importance: Inversions are essential movements in this system, allowing for smooth transitions, dynamic entries, and control over the opponent's movements.

b. Technique: Requires hamstring flexibility and specific hip movement. Involves tucking the elbow, placing toes on the mat, lifting the hips, bringing the head towards the legs, and rolling over the shoulder with control.

c. Safety: Proper stretching and technique are crucial to avoid injury.

17. Detailed Breakdown of Finishing Positions (opens in a new tab)

a. Backside 50/50 Inside Heel Hook:

  • Positional Control: In backside 50/50, your legs are interlocked with the opponent's, but you are facing away from them. Your goal is to isolate and expose their heel for the heel hook.
  • Foot Elevation: Lift the opponent's foot upwards, keeping it away from your body to prevent them from rolling out.
  • Turning Side-On: Rotate your body 90 degrees to the side, allowing your elbow to connect with their toes.
  • Toes to Ribs: Pull the toes back towards your ribs, maximizing exposure of the heel.
  • Heel Capture: Secure a deep grip on the heel with your hands, locking your fingers for a strong hold.
  • Submission Finish: Extend your upper body backwards, then drive your hips forward to generate torque on the knee joint, securing the tap.

b. Standing Crab Ride Back Take:

  • Positional Control: You are behind your opponent with your feet hooked inside their thighs, similar to a traditional crab ride but with your opponent standing.
  • Pulling Down: Reach for the opponent's hips and pull them downwards towards the mat.
  • Securing Hooks: As the opponent descends, quickly secure both hooks deep inside their thighs to prevent them from escaping.
  • Back Control: Once you have established back control, maintain a tight squeeze and work towards securing a seatbelt grip and attacking chokes.

c. Berimbolo Back Take:

  • Hip Control: From a leg entanglement, such as De La Riva, knock the opponent's hips to the mat while maintaining control of their legs.
  • Leg Positioning: Thread your legs around the opponent's body, working towards a deep hook behind their knees.
  • Rolling Through: Roll over your shoulder, bringing your hips over the opponent's back.
  • Back Control: Secure your hooks and establish a strong back control position, attacking chokes and maintaining a tight squeeze.

d. Prone Armbar (Choibar/Gedbar):

  • Arm Isolation: Control the opponent's arm, typically from a head-and-arm control position or by trapping their arm in K Guard.
  • Leg Placement: Step on the opponent's thigh with your outside leg, ensuring that your knee is behind their armpit.
  • Extension and Kick Out: Extend the opponent's arm by pushing their wrist away and simultaneously kicking their leg out with your outside leg.
  • Armbar Capture: Slide your hips forward, trapping the opponent's arm between your legs, and securing a deep grip on their elbow.
  • Submission Finish: Extend your hips and pull the trapped arm towards your chest to complete the armbar submission.

18. Guard Retention and Common Counters (opens in a new tab)

a. Maintaining Strong Frames: Always prioritize maintaining strong frames with your arms and legs to prevent the opponent from breaking your posture or securing underhooks. b. Pummeling and Footwork: Efficient pummeling and precise footwork are essential for transitioning between positions, preventing leg drags, and staying ahead of the opponent's attempts to pass. c. Adapting to Opponent's Reactions: Be prepared to adapt your game plan based on the opponent's reactions. If one attack is unsuccessful, seamlessly transition to another option within your open guard system. d. Understanding Common Counters: Recognize common counters to your attacks, such as sprawls, knee cuts, underhooks, leg drags, and back takes. Develop specific responses to each counter, maintaining control and continuing your offensive flow.

19. Advanced Concepts and Strategies (opens in a new tab)

a. Linking Positions:

  • System Integration: This instructional emphasizes that each open guard position is not isolated but part of a larger, interconnected system.
  • Seamless Transitions: Develop the ability to flow smoothly between K Guard, De La Riva, Reverse De La Riva, Waiter, Single Leg X-Guard, X-Guard, 50/50, and 70/30, exploiting opportunities as they arise.
  • Reacting to Pressure: Understand how to react to the opponent's pressure and adjust your guard accordingly, transitioning to the most advantageous position based on their movements.

b. Timing and Sensitivity:

  • Feeling the Pressure: Become attuned to the opponent's weight distribution, pressure, and intentions.
  • Anticipating Reactions: Learn to anticipate how the opponent will react to your movements and adjust your timing to capitalize on their responses.
  • Exploiting Opportunities: Openings for attacks often appear for brief moments. Develop the sensitivity to recognize and exploit these windows of opportunity.

c. Body Mechanics and Leverage:

  • Maximizing Efficiency: Utilize proper body mechanics to generate maximum leverage with minimal effort.
  • Hip Movement and Angles: Understand the importance of hip movement and angling your body to optimize your leverage and control over the opponent.
  • Combining Pressure Points: Combine pressure from your arms, legs, and hips to create a cumulative effect that breaks the opponent's balance and opens up opportunities for attacks.

d. Mental Game:

  • Confidence and Patience: Develop confidence in your technique and remain patient, waiting for the right opportunities to attack.
  • Problem-Solving Mindset: View each roll as a puzzle to solve. Adapt to the opponent's defenses and find creative solutions to overcome obstacles.
  • Staying Ahead of the Game: Constantly seek to improve your understanding of the game and anticipate your opponent's next move, staying one step ahead.

20. Training Methodology (opens in a new tab)

a. Drilling and Specific Training:

  • Drilling Entries and Transitions: Repeatedly drill the entry and transition sequences for each position, developing muscle memory and fluidity.
  • Specific Sparring: Engage in specific sparring scenarios that focus on particular techniques or positions, isolating and refining your skills.
  • Troubleshooting Problem Areas: Identify areas where you struggle and create training drills that target those weaknesses, working with a partner to improve.

b. Building a Game Plan:

  • Personalized Strategy: Develop a personalized game plan that aligns with your strengths and preferences.
  • Primary and Secondary Attacks: Identify your primary attacks from each position and develop secondary options to counter common defenses.
  • Adapting to Different Opponents: Recognize that you may need to adjust your game plan based on the opponent's size, strength, and grappling style.

21. Long-Term Development (opens in a new tab)

a. Continual Refinement: The open guard game is a lifelong journey of learning and refinement. Dedicate consistent time to practice, drilling, and analyzing your performance. b. Seeking Feedback: Train with experienced partners and instructors who can provide constructive feedback and help you identify areas for improvement. c. Studying the Game: Watch high-level grapplers compete, analyze their techniques, and incorporate new concepts into your own game.

Concept Catalog

details

Open Guard System Overview & Learning Strategies

  1. Open Guard Definition: Emphasizes outside leg positioning, encompassing K Guard, De La Riva, Waiter, Reverse De La Riva, Single Leg X, 70/30, Backside 50/50, and Berimbolo. Excludes butterfly and shin-to-shin guards. 0:00 - 2:20 (opens in a new tab)

  2. Instructional Approach: In-depth, detailed, and geared towards advanced practitioners. Recommends revisiting the content over time and focusing on primary attacks and concepts within each position. 2:20 - 5:00 (opens in a new tab)

  3. Training Methodology: Suggests drilling entries and specific positional training to solidify movements and troubleshoot problem areas. 5:00 - 8:00 (opens in a new tab)

Open Guard Position Hierarchy

  1. Primary Entry Points: K Guard against kneeling opponents, De La Riva against standing opponents, Reverse De La Riva as a reaction to knee cuts. 8:00 - 10:00 (opens in a new tab)

  2. Secondary Guards: Waiter, Single Leg X, and 70/30, accessed from primary entry points. 10:00 - 12:00 (opens in a new tab)

  3. End-Stage Positions: Backside 50/50, Berimbolo, Standing Crab Ride, and Prone Arm Lock, aiming for finishes, back takes, or sweeps. 12:00 - 13:30 (opens in a new tab)

  4. Reverse De La Riva as a Transition: Considered a temporary position, prioritizing transitions back to K Guard or De La Riva. 36:20 - 37:00 (opens in a new tab)

  5. Leg Entanglements as Upgrades: 70/30 and 50/50 offer greater offensive opportunities than Waiter or Single Leg X. 37:00 - 38:00 (opens in a new tab)

Gi vs No-Gi Considerations

  1. Gi Control Advantage: Gi allows for superior control of posture and upper body, facilitating lassos and upper body attacks. 14:55 - 16:20 (opens in a new tab)

  2. No-Gi Leg Focus: No-Gi open guard primarily focuses on leg entanglements and attacks due to limited upper body control. 16:20 - 16:50 (opens in a new tab)

  3. Transferable Concepts: Open guard principles and leg entanglements from No-Gi are applicable to Gi with some modifications. 16:50 - 17:00 (opens in a new tab)

Choosing a Guard Style

  1. Open Guard Complexity and Effectiveness: High complexity with numerous variables demands longer learning curve but offers greater effectiveness and timing-based defense. 17:00 - 18:20 (opens in a new tab)

  2. Inside Leg Positioning Guards: Butterfly, Half Butterfly, and Shin-to-Shin provide leg protection but expose the upper body and lack the strong stomping defense of open guard. Not ideal against bigger, skilled opponents. 20:30 - 26:20 (opens in a new tab)

  3. Half Guard Variants: Aggressive style suited for short time frames and adaptable for various body types. Provides knee shield defense but still exposes upper body and requires close range. 26:20 - 28:30 (opens in a new tab)

  4. Outside Leg Positioning Guards: Ideal for leg entanglements, back takes, and sweeps. Offers superior guard passing defense and protection from upper body submissions. Best choice against larger opponents. 28:30 - 32:50 (opens in a new tab)

  5. Leg Entanglements as Universal Upgrades: Transitioning to leg entanglements (Single Leg X, 70/30, 50/50) from any guard style is generally advantageous. 23:30 - 24:30 (opens in a new tab)

Key Concepts for K Guard

  1. Leg Across Body Principle: Passing the opponent's leg across the body in leg entanglements allows for back takes, limits opponent's ability to face, and exposes the inside heel hook. 39:20 - 40:30 (opens in a new tab)

  2. Knee Line Control: Capturing the opponent's knee line past your hips is crucial for successful leg locks. Keeping your own knee line below the opponent's hips protects against leg locks. 40:30 - 42:00 (opens in a new tab)

  3. Safe Leg Lock Entries: K Guard shin frame and outside leg threading (like 50/50) minimize back take risks compared to inside leg entries. 42:00 - 44:30 (opens in a new tab)

  4. K Guard Foot Placement: Position your foot just past the opponent's hip for optimal knee leverage and control, preventing peeling and backstepping escapes. 35:20 - 37:20 (opens in a new tab)

  5. Top Leg Utilization: Use the top leg as a knee shield, hook, or back heel to control distance, prevent retreat, create space for inversions, and change sides. 38:00 - 41:30 (opens in a new tab)

  6. Preventing Opponent from Occupying Space: Protect the space between your knees and shoulder, using frames, knee shields, and top leg control to deny cross faces and maintain access for inversions. 41:30 - 43:00 (opens in a new tab)

  7. Stopping Retreat: Prioritize preventing opponent's retreat using armpit hooks with the foot, shin, knee, or hand. 43:00 - 46:10 (opens in a new tab)

  8. Forcing Sideways Turn: Off-balance or pull the opponent to turn sideways, exposing the leg and arm for easier K Guard entry. 46:10 - 47:00 (opens in a new tab)

  9. Hips Out for Inversions: Turn your hips out for smoother inversions into K Guard, facilitating back heels and transitions to Reverse De La Riva. 48:00 - 49:50 (opens in a new tab)

  10. Two-on-One Grip: Separating the opponent's elbow from the hip using a two-on-one grip is crucial for K Guard entries, especially from open guard. 12:00 - 13:20 (opens in a new tab)

  11. Breaking Grips to Pummel: Use a chopping motion with your heel on the inside of the opponent's forearm to break grips and pummel your leg into K Guard. 52:00 - 54:20 (opens in a new tab)

  12. Preventing and Dealing with Cross Faces: Keep your head tucked during inversions and use frames, knee shields, and top leg control to deny cross faces. Push the opponent's torso away from your head and duck under if they secure a cross face. 54:30 - 58:20 (opens in a new tab)

Specific K Guard Entries & Troubleshooting

  1. From Closed Guard: Frame shoulders, place knees in front, hip escape to the side, pull on one side while dropping the opposite knee, secure underhook and grip. 51:30 - 53:00 (opens in a new tab)

  2. From Open Guard (Kneeling Opponent): Secure a two-on-one grip on the arm, hip escape to the side, pummel foot under the armpit, invert and connect to the leg. 12:00 - 18:20 (opens in a new tab)

  3. Against Sprawling Opponent (Kneeling): Retract the bottom leg, lift hips, roll through while framing the shoulder, secure the opposite side K Guard. 30:00 - 34:40 (opens in a new tab)

  4. Against Sitting Back Opponent (Kneeling): Use push-pull with legs and shoulder roll to bring opponent forward, curl in while facing the ground, secure underhook and grip. 20:50 - 24:50 (opens in a new tab)

  5. Against Combat Base: Frame upper body, adjust bottom leg positioning (across hip, past hip, or key mast), use top leg as knee shield or armpit step, back heel to center knee, sit forward and secure underhook. 2:50 - 7:00 (opens in a new tab)

  6. Against Standing Opponent: Secure a two-on-one grip, hip escape to the side, pummel under the armpit, invert and reach for the leg. 21:10 - 23:30 (opens in a new tab)

  7. From De La Riva (Standing Opponent): Underhook De La Riva, block knee advancement, retract hips and drop knee inside for shallow K Guard, transition to regular K Guard. 24:40 - 26:00 (opens in a new tab)

  8. From Reverse De La Riva: Pummel foot to armpit, extend, reach for leg while framing, pull to center and sit forward, or fold leg across and invert through. 27:40 - 29:40 (opens in a new tab)

  9. From Guard Retention (North South): Secure shoulder frames, bring knees up, drive knees behind armpits, fold foot underneath, step on armpit, reach for leg, and secure K Guard. 41:00 - 46:10 (opens in a new tab)

  10. From Guard Retention (Under the Legs Pass): Free knee, pummel foot under the arm, secure underhook and grip. 47:10 - 49:00 (opens in a new tab)

  11. From Guard Retention (Leg Drag): Spin towards North South as leg is dragged, shoot knee under and foot outside, underhook the leg, and secure K Guard. 49:50 - 52:00 (opens in a new tab)

Advanced K Guard Concepts

  1. Changing Sides: Use top leg underhook and shin kick to transition to the opposite side K Guard when opponent retreats or defends the initial entry. 27:30 - 29:00 (opens in a new tab)

  2. Attacking the Arm: If K Guard is heavily blocked, secure head and arm control, transition to a prone arm bar or arm lock. 2:00 - 8:20 (opens in a new tab)

  3. Triangle from K Guard: If opponent exposes the arm, grip tricep, shoot hips up, collect head with knee, swivel to the opposite hip, and secure triangle. 5:10 - 5:40 (opens in a new tab)

  4. K Guard to Close Guard: Lift K Guard leg high, shoot opposite leg through, change head and hand position, shoot hips up and lock closed guard, use leg positioning for sweeps or arm bars. 5:40 - 6:20 (opens in a new tab)

  5. Shallow K Guard Offense: Transition to regular K Guard, backside 50/50, or X Guard depending on opponent's reactions and leg positioning. 5:20 - 6:20 (opens in a new tab)

  6. Troubleshooting Backstepping Opponents (Backside 50/50): Retract knee and step foot in front of stomach as opponent backsteps, maintaining knee line control and reaping for outside ashi garami. 44:10 - 46:00 (opens in a new tab)

  7. Dealing with Knee Freed from Backside 50/50: Salvage heel hook by supporting foot, placing tricep behind leg, and swimming back, or transition to crab ride by hooking the leg, turning knee out, and pushing foot aside. 38:10 - 44:00 (opens in a new tab)

  8. Countering Foot Locks: Use K Guard leg to step on hip, preventing bridging and freeing the trapped leg. 37:40 - 39:40 (opens in a new tab)

  9. Countering Crab Ride Entries: Pummel inside leg to prevent underhooks and leg drags, take K Guard leg across body if opponent enters crab ride. 40:20 - 44:00 (opens in a new tab)

Transcript

details

KGuardVol1-8

[00:00:00] Speaker: [00:00:10] [00:00:20] so this series is on open guard offense. And. Or it could be that you've got a particular subset of this series, which is focused on a particular type of [00:00:30] guard, for example, K guard or De La Riva and waiter position, right? So this is the, this first chapter you're looking at now is a general chapter that will cover whether you're [00:00:40] getting the whole open guard series or whether you're getting those individual, uh, instructionals.

[00:00:45] Now when I say open guard, what I really mean is open guard playing with outside leg [00:00:50] positioning. I think open guard is a term that gets thrown around a lot. People who play butterfly guard often call that open guard. For me, I don't call that open guard, I call that butterfly guard. Similar to shin to shin, where we're playing [00:01:00] inside leg positioning.

[00:01:01] I don't consider that an open guard. For me, open guard is Trying to get your feet in front of your opponent, having outside leg positioning. [00:01:10] Guards such as K Guard and Dela Heva obviously have your feet on the outside for outside leg positioning. We also have reverse Dela Heva and waiter which [00:01:20] you do actually have one leg on the inside but I consider this part of the Open Guard system it links really well with our entry points.

[00:01:26] And then some getting further through into leg entanglements. A little bit [00:01:30] on single leg X Guard. Some on the 70 30 position, the backside 50 50, and the Barenballer. What we're not covering in this is guard [00:01:40] retention. Guard retention is a huge other topic and I've got an instructional out on that with Ariel Tabak, the guard retention anthology, so check that out if you're [00:01:50] wanting to focus on guard retention.

[00:01:51] In this first chapter, I'll very briefly touch on guard retention, but otherwise it's really going to be about offense, which. [00:02:00] When I say offense, within each position, there's a little bit of retention. Like once you have De La Riva, there's a little bit of guard retention within De La Riva to keep you on the front foot.

[00:02:09] [00:02:10] I will be covering that. What I won't be covering is when, for example, you lose De La Riva and someone's in your open guard trying to pass and you no longer have control of the grips.[00:02:20]

[00:02:25] The idea of this first chapter is we're gonna give you an overview of the open guard series [00:02:30] and also try to set you up so you're able to learn the rest of the components really well. Because we kind of, it's really segmented into positions. So it's [00:02:40] segmented into the K guard, De La Riva, Waiter, and so on.

[00:02:44] There's about seven different positions covered within this. And they go quite [00:02:50] deep into that. But this first chapter is to give you an idea, a general idea of what those positions are, how they fit together. And I'm also going to provide a little bit of [00:03:00] a basic game plan. I think one of the. critiques I've had on some of my instructionals.

[00:03:05] I tend to go quite deep, show a lot of detail. I probably aim this really almost [00:03:10] at a, I aim it as in like what would I myself have liked to learn maybe three or four years ago as a black belt. So I'm putting a lot of detail in and I expect people to be using this series [00:03:20] over, you know, it should be over a couple of years and you keep coming back to it and identifying new little bits and problems you're having and how to solve them.

[00:03:27] It's not something you're meant to watch all at [00:03:30] once. So because of that and because of the depth of information there, it can be hard to just sit in and figure out the general idea [00:03:40] behind it because I'm putting a lot of detail in. So this first chapter is to give you kind of a broad overview and the main things we're looking for and then the individual chapters start to go into more [00:03:50] depth on those.

[00:03:51] I suggest that you look at the primary attack. So I have the, I have the techniques labeled. If you don't have the labels for the technique, then you need to be watching it. [00:04:00] Online, on the website, because on the website you should be able to see the name of the technique or the topic of the thing you're watching.

[00:04:08] And by doing [00:04:10] that, you should be able to look for the primary attack. That's the first thing that you want to learn or be good at in the position. So when I get to, for example, the 50 50 position, what's the [00:04:20] main move I'm going for? Learn that first, get good at it, and then you can start going off counters to counters.

[00:04:25] The other thing you're going to want is to understand the concepts behind what's happening And I [00:04:30] think that's something you can probably you can often with the concepts watch through that once and get a really good understanding of what we're trying to do in the position and how The controls work and what your opponent's looking for [00:04:40] So I suggest when you go to a chapter in a particular chapter watch through the concepts and do that primary attack Try that out from there, have [00:04:50] problems, things are going to work, things are not going to work, things that aren't going to work, you can then start to look through the instructional and build a game based upon that.

[00:04:58] The order that I recommend [00:05:00] you approach this is first go through the two biggest chapters which are K Guard and Dela Heva. These are the main entry points and [00:05:10] then from there you can start working through the layers. So if you're doing K Guard and you're ending up For example, 70 30 or single leg X, then you can go to that [00:05:20] section.

[00:05:20] Now you don't have to go all the way through K guard. You can just kind of do the primary attacks. And then if you find that from there, you're, you're working out into these other positions, then you can [00:05:30] start exploring those as well. I tend to talk a little slower than I perhaps should, because I'm trying to get the, make sure I say the right thing.

[00:05:39] But if [00:05:40] you want it to, you can put it on 1. 5 speed and it'll make me talk a little quicker.[00:05:50]

[00:05:50] Talking about how to, like talking about using this series, so how to drill and how to best learn the content in terms of actual application. So I recommend drilling first [00:06:00] and specific training the positions too. So at first you want to be good at the movements, obviously first you want to understand what you're doing so you can watch the concepts and so on.

[00:06:08] then you want to be good at the [00:06:10] movements and not have to think about them when you're rolling. So if I was going to do this kaya, let's say it's K guard, I would be maybe drilling my entry into into backside [00:06:20] 50 50 and we can do reps of this, okay? It's good at first, just the base movement, maybe our primary attack to start going close guard, K guard, [00:06:30] backside 50 50.

[00:06:32] And I might put a five minute timer on and repeat that. that movement over and over again, just to [00:06:40] really solidify what I'm doing. Once I've got that, then we want to do specific training and you can do that at various stages throughout the move. So I've got Kaya again [00:06:50] for specific training. It might be that at first I want to start getting good at when I'm in the K guard position, getting the leg up and getting it on top.

[00:06:59] So we're going to start [00:07:00] here. Kaya is going to get back, might start here. Kaya is going to resist. We shake hands. And we go from here. I've got to try and get to my position. He's got to try to escape. If he [00:07:10] escapes, okay, cool. I'm going to reset, go again, start from here, and we go again. And this is a great way to learn.

[00:07:16] And you just troubleshoot the area that you're having [00:07:20] difficulty with and start from there. So if I'm finding it hard to get to K guard, then I might, I might work from, you know, this position where I've got control of it. I got my feet under the armpits. I might work [00:07:30] a little earlier if I'm finding that more difficult.

[00:07:32] If I'm finding it difficult, once I get to the backside 50 50 position, we might start from here and I'll do my training from here. So you can really [00:07:40] hone in based on your areas you're having trouble with. And that's how the instruction was laid out. You should be able to find that, the solution to the issue you've, you've got, and you can train that [00:07:50] position.

[00:07:50] I recommend starting from there, going for a good five minutes just on repeat. And anytime you're out of position, reset.[00:08:00]

[00:08:01] So I just want to go through the guards that we're going to be playing in this, in this series, right? So when we're against a kneeling opponent, so the [00:08:10] first guards are our, our entry points into getting control. Okay, so the first one we're going to look for against a kneeling opponent is going to be K [00:08:20] guard.

[00:08:20] So I'm going to be looking, put my, which is where my foot's on the outside, knees on the inside, and that lets me get into the K guard position here. So I'm officially in the K guard position now, foot on the [00:08:30] outside, knee on the inside, holding onto the leg, and this can start to set me up

[00:08:34] Speaker 2: to get into some of the deeper guards.[00:08:40]

[00:08:45] If I'm against a standing opponent,

[00:08:48] Speaker: I'm usually looking to [00:08:50] get to Delaheva. Yeah. So my foot comes around the leg as a hook, right? Gripping onto the ankle. So this is our other entry [00:09:00] point is Delaheva. K guard when they're kneeling,

[00:09:03] Speaker 2: Delaheva when they're standing.[00:09:10]

[00:09:15] The one extra one, which is

[00:09:17] Speaker: based on my opponent's reaction. If they go [00:09:20] to do a cross knee through is reverse Delaheva here, right? So I get my inside hook now. So if you went back before, Delaheva was when my foot here. [00:09:30] Went from the outside and hooked Mikhail's leg. Reverse De La Riva is now going to be when my foot goes from the inside and hooks Mikhail's leg.

[00:09:39] [00:09:40] And I really only use this one, this Reverse De La Riva, is used only as a reaction to him going in for this. I don't look to attach to Reverse De La Riva [00:09:50] from the start. So if I've got someone standing, I look for De La Riva. Right? Only if he goes for the knee cut when he's standing. Will I go to

[00:09:57] Speaker 2: reverse delt heaver and play from here?[00:10:00]

[00:10:07] So from these primary

[00:10:08] Speaker: entry points, [00:10:10] we have some secondary guards that you don't immediately get to, but you can get to from these guards that we first entered. One example would be waiter where I start to reach [00:10:20] towards the far leg. Mikhail drops down to his knee and I swing my hips back.

[00:10:25] Speaker 2: This is the waiter position.[00:10:30] [00:10:40]

[00:10:42] Another example is the single

[00:10:44] Speaker: leg X guard and X guard where we can start to attach into [00:10:50] the leg here. So this would be single X if I've got an overhook here and X guard if I'm hooking onto the far

[00:10:58] Speaker 2: leg like this.[00:11:00] [00:11:10] [00:11:20]

[00:11:23] The other secondary

[00:11:24] Speaker: position that we'll work from is the 70 30 where we've passed the leg [00:11:30] across the body. Okay, so this could be 70 30 where I've got, essentially like my feet,

[00:11:34] Speaker 2: um, hooked in front of the body here.[00:11:40]

[00:11:43] Or it could be 50 50 if

[00:11:45] Speaker 3: I thread my leg across Mikawa's [00:11:50] leg here. Okay, so we're working with all

[00:11:51] Speaker 2: sorts of fractions.[00:12:00]

[00:12:03] So what you'll

[00:12:03] Speaker: find is each of those secondary positions can be found from those primary positions. So from Della Hiva, [00:12:10] K Guard, and from Reverse Della Hiva, you can often get into 70 30, into single leg X, or into the waiter position. From there, [00:12:20] we have entries to our really like end stage positions where we're looking to either finish, take the back, or potentially sweep.

[00:12:27] Example of that would be the backside 50 [00:12:30] 50 where I chop Mikhail's knee down and I've got 50 50 here with the leg pinned where I can start to look for a heel hook.[00:12:40]

[00:12:44] Speaker 2: We've got the berimbolo.

[00:12:45] Speaker: If we can knock our opponent's

[00:12:46] Speaker 3: hips to the ground, we can look to a back take [00:12:50] from here.[00:13:00]

[00:13:01] Speaker 2: And we've got what I'll call like a

[00:13:03] Speaker: standing crab ride where I've spun out the back and I've pulled my feet behind

[00:13:09] Speaker 2: [00:13:10] here, looking to take the back from here.[00:13:20]

[00:13:21] Another finishing position

[00:13:22] Speaker: that we can look for is to attack the upper body where I can start to go for the back. Essentially what we call [00:13:30] a choi bar or a prone arm lock here and look to get the finish from that. So this will often come when someone is really going upper body heavy against us trying to attach to the

[00:13:39] Speaker 2: [00:13:40] legs.[00:13:50]

[00:13:50] So again, each of these

[00:13:51] Speaker: finishing positions can often be found from those secondary positions or from those primary entry points as well. So, Within [00:14:00] this you're going to find that if you can link these positions together that creates a really good open guard and no matter where your opponent goes you can keep them within that system so you really got systems within a [00:14:10] system that work together until we either get a sweep a back take or the leg lock finish.[00:14:20] [00:14:30] [00:14:40] [00:14:50]

[00:14:55] Talking about the difference between gi and no gi [00:15:00] in the terms of open guard and whether I would actually play this same style in the Gi. I mean, so there are, first off, there are some big differences in Open Guard for Gi [00:15:10] and No Gi. The main difference is the ability to control posture and control the upper body.

[00:15:15] So, Kai is standing up.[00:15:20]

[00:15:20] Let's say I've got Open Guard here. In No Gi, it's very difficult to control the upper body. I'm trying to reach for the head. First off, let's flower away. And second, even [00:15:30] if I do, I can't really hold that long. You can easily like clear that grip and I don't have the head anymore. Same with the, I can hold the arm, which can be okay, but it's not, it's very hard to actually break [00:15:40] Pakaia's posture down and it can probably reasonably easily circle that grip.

[00:15:43] We still use that grip, but it's not as good as what we can get in the Gi. I don't have a Gi on, but in the Gi, you know, I've [00:15:50] got a collar grip, which I can pull down. I won't wreck your rashy, so just go with it. Yeah, so I can break Kai's posture. I can put things like lassos in, [00:16:00] and these are really, these really tie up our opponent in open guard.

[00:16:03] Okay, so that's the big difference. We now, once I've got that, I've got ability to attack the upper body really well [00:16:10] in the gi. I can shoot omoplatas, triangles. The upper body attacks are good. Really in no gi from open guard, it's predominantly, we're just getting to the legs. Okay, which [00:16:20] absolutely works in the Gi as well.

[00:16:21] In fact, I would play the same game that I'm playing no Gi in the Gi. I'd probably add a few um, lassos and some [00:16:30] things which help with the guard retention. But you can, you can definitely still have predominantly leg based entanglements and working to get into De La Riva, [00:16:40] K guard, single leg AX7030, all these positions that we're going to cover.

[00:16:43] So for me, I would actually have pretty much the same game No gi at the moment, uh, except for [00:16:50] the ability to control the upper body grips and posture.

[00:16:57] All the styles of guard to play, I think [00:17:00] open guard is probably the most complicated to learn. It's, the reason is, there's a lot of variables at play and you've got to deal with a [00:17:10] lot of things and the timing and the speed, everything happens a bit faster. So. Because of that, it takes a long time to learn.

[00:17:18] So if Kaya's up, [00:17:20] I'm on bottom. If I'm trying to play open guard, especially in this open position here, I'm, I'm really got all four of my limbs that could be engaging on, on Kaya. And [00:17:30] he's similarly could be using his feet to be turning left, right, forward, back. And his arms could be controlling my legs and my hips.

[00:17:36] And there's a, there's a lot of different directions he can go. He can try [00:17:40] and pass through around under the legs. It's all quite open. Right. So. As I said, that, that, the complexity in that makes it very difficult to learn, but I also think [00:17:50] that makes it the most effective. Because when you get good at this, you can often, you can become very good at timing and dealing with each limb.

[00:17:59] It takes [00:18:00] longer to get good at, but once you get good at these things, it's harder for your opponent to have the tools to develop defense to that. It requires more out of them as well to actually be able to defend. So once we [00:18:10] start getting good at timing and pummeling and having all these different options that we can throw at our opponent, we have a really effective guy.

[00:18:16] If we compare it for example to half guard, so [00:18:20] Kaya down on his knee, here it's a lot slower so things happen, you have more time to react. Also, it's not completely, [00:18:30] there's battles that will be going on with our legs, but they're a lot smaller and a lot slower and we're really kind of anchored down with our lower body.

[00:18:37] So it starts becoming, [00:18:40] there's less options, less variables at play in a position such as half guard, which obviously I like half guard, it's a good guard to play. to play and I think it's a great one to [00:18:50] start with because you can learn, you can learn to be good at it reasonably quickly. Open guard, I do think is probably more effective, but it takes a longer time to get good at it.[00:19:00]

[00:19:04] So when navigating this instructional, where should you look for entries? So obviously, if [00:19:10] the, if I'm, if you're looking at a section on, for example, the waiter position, then you, in the waiter section, I'll show some [00:19:20] entries in there, but if the entry is from Dela Hiva, for example, so it's Dela Hiva to waiter, the more detailed explanation will be found in the Dela Hiva section.

[00:19:29] So I'll be [00:19:30] showing kind of, I want, I want you to think about like, we're in Dela Hiva, what, what's, what's my options from there. And I'll go through in a lot of detail about what to do from when you're in Dela Hiva. [00:19:40] One of those options would be to branch out into. the waiter position. Okay, so then you've got the section of now we're in waiter.

[00:19:47] What do we do from there? Okay. And in [00:19:50] that waiter section, I will just briefly recap some of the entries. And so to give you context of how we got there, but if you're looking for info on how to get into detailed info on how to get [00:20:00] into the waiter or any of the other guards, uh, that you're, that you're looking at, then go to the section where you're getting there from.[00:20:10]

[00:20:12] I think it's really important that your game is congruent in that the guards that you play fit well with each other. You can choose [00:20:20] some types of guards that don't fit with other types of guards and if your game is, if you're trying to structure your game like that, it won't really work, okay? So I tend to break.[00:20:30]

[00:20:30] it down into three main subtypes of guard player. There is inside position. This would be putting my feet on the inside. Could use something like shin to shin [00:20:40] here. It could be even the curls on his knees. I use butterfly guard or even something like half butterfly. Okay. So you can see in each of those scenarios, my feet [00:20:50] have gone to the inside.

[00:20:53] There's half guards. So this is where one foot's on the inside and one foot's on the outside. [00:21:00] So we've got half guard here, Mikhail stands up. I might be in a sit up guard. This tends to be, uh, something people will play when they're being quite [00:21:10] aggressive, coming forward, trying to attack that by attaching to a leg, like a wrestling style of attack.

[00:21:15] Even within that, you've got deep half guard. So Mikhail comes down.

[00:21:19] Speaker 3: Here, [00:21:20] one leg

[00:21:20] Speaker: is trapped between both my legs. I've got one leg inside, one leg outside. And reverse De La Riva. [00:21:30] I would consider similar to that. One foot's inside, one foot's outside. Like this. Lastly, we've got outside positioning guards.

[00:21:37] De La Riva. [00:21:40] Key guard, here. I'd even put closed guard into that too. And these, uh, these link together really well. Okay? Generally, what you'll [00:21:50] find is that if you're playing with outside leg positioning, Other outside leg positioning guards will link really well with that K guard. Fits really well with a game [00:22:00] based around De La Riva or closed guard, for example.

[00:22:03] If you're playing inside leg position, if you're playing shin to shin, then you're probably going to suit well to play something like [00:22:10] butterfly guard. If you're playing half guard, you're probably likely to work well with things like sit up guard, deep half guard, reverse De La Riva. So, the main reason is, [00:22:20] usually when you start your match, or when you have some opponent coming towards you, one of the first choices you make is, what am I doing with my feet?

[00:22:27] Do I want them on the inside? Do I want one in, [00:22:30] one out? Or do I want them on the outside? You can link one in and one out reasonably well. So a half guard, or a reverse de la jiva for [00:22:40] example, can work quite well with an outside positioning guard. And you see we cover reverse de la jiva in this instructional.

[00:22:46] Similarly, if you're playing half butterfly, so an [00:22:50] inside leg positioning guard, that can link in quite well with a half guard. What doesn't link too well is playing butterfly and something like K guard, where my feet are on the inside, and [00:23:00] then I'm trying to take both feet out to the outside. So if Mikado's on his knees here, you'll see, trying to play Butterfly here and then trying to like take my feet out [00:23:10] to the outside here.

[00:23:11] It's kind of often too big of a movement and it won't fit well very congruently as a game. Similarly to when I was playing K guard and then [00:23:20] trying to put my feet back into a butterfly. You'll see how awkward that looks and it's going to give your opponent big opportunities to counter attack you if you're trying to mix [00:23:30] things that don't work together well.

[00:23:31] There is one other type of guard that I would Categorize and I think this is almost always an upgrade to do this, which is to get into a leg entanglement. [00:23:40] Okay. So leg entanglements being where essentially I get underneath Kyle's hips and I'm attached to, to one of his legs. So we could say single leg X is a [00:23:50] leg entanglement.

[00:23:51] I've got that 70 30 position. We've got 50 50. Um, you could probably slightly classify even waiter as a, to some degree as part of a leg [00:24:00] entanglement, or at least a great entry way into the leg entanglement. The reason why this is good is we've now got our opponent's weight on top of us. We can start spinning out towards the back.

[00:24:09] [00:24:10] We can start to attack leg locks on the, on the leg we've attached to. We can off balance them really well because they're, they're sitting right on top of us. We've got their weight that we can [00:24:20] adjust and move, right? So each guard, any guard style that you play with, you play inside leg positioning, outside leg positioning, or one in and one out, any of those half guard variants.

[00:24:29] If you've got [00:24:30] the ability to go to a leg entanglement, it's generally an upgrade to do so.

[00:24:39] So even though my [00:24:40] legs are, uh, uh, protected, what I do does start to become vulnerable by playing inside leg position is I have to start bringing my upper body forward. This exposes [00:24:50] me to the chance of upper body attacks. My car could potentially look for my neck. He could look for Kimuras and arm locks and upper body attacks from here.

[00:24:59] [00:25:00] Another big issue is. I've given up my first layer of the guard. So you can definitely have good retention if you play inside leg positioning, [00:25:10] but I've given up my strongest attack for guard retention, which is my ability to step and push away as a stomping action. Okay. So if you're against someone [00:25:20] big, then you want your strongest muscles, your quads and your hamstrings and your glutes able to kick and push away to make this.

[00:25:29] As soon as you put your [00:25:30] feet on the inside, you've taken away your ability to do that well. Now, I'm relying more on my, my shin and my upper body to start making space. And [00:25:40] this means that Mikhail's one step closer to passing my guard, and I'm having to start to use a bit more strength to actually keep him off.

[00:25:48] So we have given up [00:25:50] one layer of the guard, and that can mean there's more like, it's more likely that you get your guard passed if you're playing this style of guard. So an issue there is that if you're playing inside leg positioning, [00:26:00] I don't feel like it scales up really well against bigger opponents.

[00:26:04] Of course you can play inside leg positioning against someone who's bigger, but if they're bigger and quite skillful, [00:26:10] personally I would not be trying to play this guard. I'd be much more likely to be playing an open guard with my leg on that legs on the outside.[00:26:20]

[00:26:22] So we had the pros and cons of using a half guard style or one in one out. Okay. One of the pros of this is that I feel like it's quite an [00:26:30] aggressive style. I'm coming at my opponent moving forward. So we're here. I'm usually sitting forward trying to force the action here, trying to attach to the hip, Mikhail's [00:26:40] standing.

[00:26:40] Then I'm trying to attach to the leg and start to come up. So for me, I would often use this style, you know, trying to attach to the leg and, and work up for a single, especially, [00:26:50] uh, in a scenario where I had a short amount of time that I had to get ahead. Another benefit is you don't need a particular body type.

[00:26:57] If you're really inflexible, really stiff, [00:27:00] then you can still play half guard really well. Whereas some of the other guards, if you're really stiff, you're going to struggle to lift your hips up, or even some people struggle to do too much of a sit up. You can play [00:27:10] variants of half guard where you don't even need to sit up.

[00:27:12] You can sweep your opponent by almost lying flat and rolling over from there. Okay. [00:27:20] So I really like half guard. It slows the game down. You can incrementally improve your position, and anyone can do it. On the downside for half guard, we are at close [00:27:30] range again. So I've given away my, my layers again. I no longer have a foot in front of my opponent, so Mikhail's got a good chance at actually squashing and closing the, [00:27:40] the gap on me.

[00:27:41] It doesn't scale particularly well against big opponents as well, so. If my car starts to put his weight on me, a lot of what's keeping him off is potentially [00:27:50] my upper body or a knee shield, which can be strong. I can get a knee shield, which is strong. I think you have a little better ability to keep them off you than from an inside position [00:28:00] where I don't actually have that knee shield available, but the knee shield can be strong, but not as strong as actually getting our feet in front like we would with, with outside leg position.[00:28:10]

[00:28:10] And I also, similar to the butterfly, I do expose my upper body to attacks. Often Makar can start to reach for my head, start attacking upper body [00:28:20] attacks, such as the Kimura, the front headlock position, and potentially arm locks from here as well.[00:28:30]

[00:28:32] Now let's talk about outside leg positioning, which is really having your feet in front of your opponent or hooked on the [00:28:40] outside. So. Pros of this, it's great for getting to leg entanglements. We can start using the, these open guards to get in towards the leg, set up leg [00:28:50] attacks. It's probably the best for chasing the back or exposing the back as well.

[00:28:54] Because we're starting to make an angle around the outside, we're actually starting to turn towards the [00:29:00] back where we can start to look to take the back. There's almost no threat of upper body submissions. So, because both feet are always engaged and [00:29:10] either on the outside or in front of Makawa becomes very difficult if he wants to attach to my head.

[00:29:15] It's very difficult to get through that, especially when we've got our arms in the in front as well to [00:29:20] defend. Similar, it's very hard for Makawa, so he went for, he could have gone for the head, could go for the upper body anywhere, arm locks, Kimuras, very difficult to dive in because the legs are always in the [00:29:30] way.

[00:29:30] Because we have this extra layer, I would say open guards are the hardest guards to pass. Whenever I think of someone, you know, throughout my years of training, people who I [00:29:40] found the hardest to pass, they always played outside league positioning. There's some lightweights, people much smaller than me, that I've rolled with before, and I've come away going, geez, that's, that's [00:29:50] a really good guard and really hard to pass.

[00:29:51] And there's always been someone who's playing with their feet with outside league positioning, because we've got that extra layer. We're always got two feet working [00:30:00] to, that we can pummel to start to make space and make distance. And going with that, having our feet in front, our strongest weapon being [00:30:10] available to attack our opponent.

[00:30:11] We, it's the best, in my opinion, the best guard to use if you're going against someone bigger. If you want your jujitsu to scale [00:30:20] up against bigger opponents, playing outside league positioning guards is probably the best way to do it. Obviously I used it at ADCC, being in the open weight division. Look at guys like, who have had [00:30:30] success at larger weight divisions.

[00:30:32] Look at Mikey Musumeki. in uh, in the gi that was, but he's able to, you know, as a rooster weight, rooster weight, [00:30:40] you can make rooster weight. Okay. Sometimes rooster weight and going against enormous opponents in the gi, he's playing outside league positioning. You don't really see [00:30:50] that for people who are playing half guard or inside league positioning at the highest level.

[00:30:53] So outside league positioning probably in fact, almost certainly the best guy to play. If you want to have a [00:31:00] game that scales up against bigger people. The other advantage of open guards is the type of leg entanglement that we can get to. So, [00:31:10] generally, by having my feet on the outside, I, and we'll talk about this a little more, but when I enter the leg locks, there's less risk of a back take because I've got my feet on the outside.[00:31:20]

[00:31:20] starting from the outside and they can block that entry. Okay, often when we should we go from the inside to enter we start risking our opponent rolling through for back [00:31:30] takes and could potentially expose our back. The downsides of playing outside leg positioning well obviously our upper body is safe we do have to be [00:31:40] aware of what we're doing with our legs there's a chance that our opponent sits back for leg locks okay so because we're leading with our legs more There's more chance of that.

[00:31:48] So we need to be really good at [00:31:50] leg lock defense. If we're going to play this style of game, we discussed this earlier, but it's probably the guard that takes the longest to learn to play outside leg positioning because of the amount of variables available. [00:32:00] There is some flexibility component to this.

[00:32:03] Definitely. You can play open guard if you're not particularly flexible, but. it's going to be easier and more effective if you do [00:32:10] stretching as well and are able to, to pummel back with your feet and potentially use invert based movements as well. Being able to spin along the ground is going to help you [00:32:20] get angles to start to attack.

[00:32:21] So in summary, outside leg positioning guards, the focus of this series, it's a low risk, high reward game to play. So we [00:32:30] can, the high reward is we can get into leg entanglements, we can get the finish From the leg locks, we can go to sweep or to take the back. And the low risk part is it's very hard for your opponent to [00:32:40] pass your guard or to get any attachment to your upper body.

[00:32:43] So, uh, it's a really good game to play, especially for the smaller athlete.[00:32:50]

[00:32:53] We talked about having a congruent style and guards that mix together well, and really this open guard series, the [00:33:00] open guards we're presenting here all fit together as a, as a system. And I want you to. I think ideally actually, I think this is, the [00:33:10] best way to do it is just playing these guards. Don't actually go to other guards and try to play from there.

[00:33:15] There are ways you could make other guards work. You could link half guard in with this, you could [00:33:20] link butterfly in with this, but in some ways you're going to be breaking some of the rules that we're, that we're thinking about for good guard retention to do that. So for [00:33:30] example, one of the major things in playing this outside positioning style is that we don't want our legs going inside, okay?

[00:33:37] This is, we're considering that a bad thing. And we don't want to play [00:33:40] guards where we put our legs in and start to attack from there. So not that you can't be good from here, but you're now potentially opening up, uh, a big gap in the [00:33:50] style of guard you're playing and it could work against you. It's better if you're playing from outside positioning to stick to outside positioning at any time.

[00:33:57] For example, if Kaya forces my leg between his [00:34:00] legs, then I need to be thinking about getting that leg back onto the outside and keep going for those guards that we're working. K guard, de la jiva, reverse de la jiva into those leg entanglements and [00:34:10] working from there. I'm[00:34:20]

[00:34:26] going to talk about positional hierarchy, um, in the system that we've [00:34:30] got going here and what we're considering an upgrade in position. All right. So. The, we've got the end points of the, of the system. So [00:34:40] if I can, in the end, I want to get to either backside 50 50. I want to get to backside 50 50 here.

[00:34:47] This is obviously an excellent point to [00:34:50] finish or to sweep and come on top. I want to get to that standing crab ride. So beat out the back here. We can get to here. I can look to take the back or again, into the leg entanglements. [00:35:00] Or I want to get to the Barambola position, so knocking Kai's hips to the ground and looking to take the back from here, okay.

[00:35:08] The other one was the prone arm bar position where [00:35:10] we can start to attack this arm. So the idea is that we can get to, from any of the guards that we cover, we could end up in immediately in [00:35:20] those end stage positions and we should look to do that as that part of our positional hierarchy. Otherwise there's a general progression from Uh, non leg entanglements [00:35:30] into leg entanglements, which is, which is an improving position.

[00:35:33] Okay. So what I mean by that, our two main, our main entry points, you can't, you can't just start in a leg entanglement. You've got to [00:35:40] get there and to get into the leg entanglements, we've got positions such as the K guard. So you see here, Kaya's, my, my legs in front of Kaya, his legs [00:35:50] behind my leg. So I'm not really in a leg entanglement.

[00:35:52] I can work though, to start to bring his leg. in front of me. Okay. So you can see now his legs in front of me. I've [00:36:00] upgraded the position. I'm now in a leg entanglement. His hips are on top of me. It's a great position now for me to start to further advance my position. I'll get the finish. So we're looking to get [00:36:10] to these leg entanglements.

[00:36:11] We've got K guard and De La Riva as our main ways we're looking to get there. Taking a step back, the position we don't, out of all the positions we cover, the [00:36:20] least good position is reverse taloheba. So, if kaya comes in for a knee cut, why is this the least good out of the positions we cover? My legs been put to the [00:36:30] inside.

[00:36:30] I'm not actually playing outside leg position, positioning technically. I'm in a little danger that the kaya actually starts to come in and get good positioning here. So, even though we do [00:36:40] cover quite a few attacks from reverse taloheba, one of our main things is it's a positional upgrade is actually just to take my leg back out okay so then i can continue with k guard or i'll [00:36:50] go to de la jiva and continue to attack from there in terms of leg entanglements so again that's when the legs come in front of my leg i'm not in one now i'm de la jiva Uh, [00:37:00] there's a, there's a, a positional improvement here as well, okay?

[00:37:03] So, the first one I'm going to talk about is the waiter position, where I'm here. I actually, I [00:37:10] technically don't think this is a leg entanglement, because technically Kai has legs behind my leg, although we're getting pretty close to that. He is still, he's starting to hover over the top of me, I've underhooked the leg, [00:37:20] I am starting to isolate it.

[00:37:21] It's not far off from being what I would consider a leg entanglement, which would be single legs, if you just watch it. I bring the leg in front of me [00:37:30] here. So now it's in front of my, my left leg. I've actually got the leg entanglement, single leg X. So that, that would be a positional upgrade. I've improved my positioning going here.

[00:37:39] [00:37:40] Even better if we have a leg entanglement and leg across body. We talk about why leg across body is really good later, but when you've got the leg cross body, this will open up a [00:37:50] greater chance to attack. So we get to leg entanglements, leg across body. And then from there really the positional upgrades from here either.

[00:37:57] sweeping, getting into the leg lock or looking towards taking

[00:37:59] Speaker 2: the [00:38:00] back for those finishing positions.[00:38:10] [00:38:20]

[00:38:21] Speaker: So where does guard retention fit into this? Okay, so if you've got your grips, then there's retention within the position and we're [00:38:30] okay, we can keep attacking and that's what we're covering. I want you to think of guard retention as kind of a shell that you're going to go into when things go wrong. So let's say Mikhail frees his leg [00:38:40] and, and now he's like starting to get around.

[00:38:42] Here's where I want to go into my guard retention postures. Okay, so I'm still, I might have outside leg positioning technically, but [00:38:50] I, I want to be focusing on guard retention right now because Mikhail's controlling the grips and I don't have an established guard. So that's when all the stuff that we cover in the guard retention [00:39:00] anthology is important to get back to control.

[00:39:02] Okay, now I've controlled the grips, I'm into the open guard game that we're playing now.[00:39:10]

[00:39:12] So an important concept to understand throughout this series is getting the leg across the body is generally an upgrade, okay? So, [00:39:20] With the leg on the outside here, so we're saying it's like the same side here, for example, in single leg X, then it's going to [00:39:30] be harder for me to do something like a back take.

[00:39:32] Mikhail's leg's in the way of me actually getting towards his back, right? If I'm able to pass his leg across my body, I [00:39:40] now start to threaten the ability to come out the back. So whenever we can, we want the leg to go from the back. the near side and take it to the far side. [00:39:50] The other advantage of, well, some other advantage of this as well, Mikhail will find it more difficult to face me.

[00:39:56] Almost by, by definition, because the legs now [00:40:00] cross the body, it's much harder to get his upper body facing me and use his grips to start dealing with my, with my upper body or my legs. When his legs back on this side, he's facing [00:40:10] me, he can start dealing and controlling my grips a lot better. And. We also get to expose the most powerful leg lock, which is the [00:40:20] inside heel lock, okay?

[00:40:21] So now that the legs across the body, at any point that I can start to expose the heel, then I've got a [00:40:30] really strong finish available.

[00:40:36] An important thing to consider, cause we're going to be looking for leg locks, and we're [00:40:40] also looking to not get leg locked, is just the concept of your knee line, okay? So, If I can manage to capture Kaya's [00:40:50] knee line past my hips, then I've got a chance, a good chance at actually finishing a leg lock, okay?

[00:40:54] So like, if I connect my grip, let's say we're going for an inside heel hook and his knees up around the line [00:41:00] of my hips, I have a great chance at getting the finish. If his knee is below the line of my hips, chances of actually finishing here are low, okay? So, uh, [00:41:10] when we're, if you're looking to enter leg locks, especially from on top to neck Kaya's.

[00:41:14] Come up on top and I'm playing guard. Okay, guard. We're here. I'm going to [00:41:20] want to be making sure my I capture his knee line and I don't let his knee line free past the line of my hips where I'd be missing the leg lock. And the same thing is going to [00:41:30] apply in reverse. Now maybe we'll go waiter. So I'm going to step out here.

[00:41:35] So if I'm worried about Kaia leg locking me, I want to be keeping my knee. [00:41:40] below the line of his hips. If he tries to leg lock my foot now, you're going to find that really difficult to get any leverage. If you start to shoot your leg up too deep and he's starting to get the line of my knee [00:41:50] past his hips, now I have to be worried.

[00:41:51] Okay, so just be aware of what's happening with your knee line, particularly in, in areas where you could be vulnerable to leg [00:42:00] locks.

[00:42:05] I just want to talk about being careful on the way that you enter for leg [00:42:10] locks, because as I get really my current thoughts nowadays, uh, just about every leg lock entry is really an opportunity for your opponent to take your back. So you need to [00:42:20] be very careful about how you approach entering the legs.

[00:42:23] If I think about, let's go back to like when I first started doing leg locks, I'd be happy to do this. One leg [00:42:30] coming over, one under and reach for the leg. Okay. And here I am exposing so much by doing that, having. having a leg inside and just shooting the other leg over the [00:42:40] top. This is really dangerous to do something like that.

[00:42:44] And you see people still doing some variants of those entries these days. And I think [00:42:50] once people get good at countering them, you're going to stop seeing those, those entries. You want one leg to really work as a block or a frame as you enter. That's why I like K guard so [00:43:00] much. When I've got my leg here, blocking his hips and blocking access to my back.

[00:43:05] I can start to enter into the leg without risk of the back take [00:43:10] occurring. Okay, so we're going to want to be looking for, for having structures in place like this so that when they go for a back take they can't, they won't be able to get it. Similarly [00:43:20] looking to enter something like the saddle from, from against someone who's, who's standing.

[00:43:24] When I look to reap like this it usually means I've got one leg I'm trying to thread through and the other one I'm linking [00:43:30] up. All example of the saddle back. So, in doing this, this Reap, Mikhail has a chance to then spin over the top [00:43:40] and look for a back take on this, right? Because it's my outside leg going in, if I instead focus on my inside leg coming up, something like a 50 50 [00:43:50] here, you can see my foot will become a block and my outside leg blocks Mikhail.

[00:43:53] So if he tries to do the same thing now, see having my other leg on the outside will, will be blocking that. By shooting your leg. [00:44:00] over, you really give your opponent a chance to start to counter attack this way. All right, so two things that I want [00:44:10] you to consider on entering leg locks. Try to achieve a K guard like position with the shin across if you want to attach to the same side or try to thread your [00:44:20] outside leg through like 50 50 and you'll limit your ability of your opponent to take your back off the inch.[00:44:30]

[00:44:31] So what if you got this series and you don't actually like heel hooks, you don't roll with heel hooks, and you're seeing all these entries into heel hooks. Well, you can actually just come on top as well. [00:44:40] So any, any of the backside 50 50 entries, although we can look to catch the heel hook, you can also be looking to just grab the leg and start getting on top [00:44:50] and establish top position as a sweep.

[00:44:52] Lachlan Giles: Alright,[00:45:00]

[00:45:07] we're now working on building [00:45:10] a, the initial game. So I'm basically going to show you like, if you're, this is your first exposure to the Open Guard content that we're covering. So if you don't have experience [00:45:20] already in De La Riva and K Guard and so on, then I'm going to show you what I think you should learn first and spend a bit of time on this.

[00:45:27] We'll also then after that go through [00:45:30] just the main attacks that I'm going to look for from each position. So you get an idea of. the main things you should be looking for in each position. Quick overview of the [00:45:40] simple game plan that we're going to give you, just so you get an idea of what it contains, okay?

[00:45:44] So against someone who's kneeling, we're going to go for K guard. So Kaya's on his knees. I'll be [00:45:50] looking to get to the K guard position and look to finish with backside 50 50. If Kaya is [00:46:00] standing, then I'll be looking to go to Dela Hida. From De La Riva, the simple one to start with is just to work towards the back.

[00:46:09] So, as [00:46:10] I move around, Kaija is going to step back as I move around and I'm going to look to pummel my feet behind and start to take the back. Then from De La [00:46:20] Riva, if Kaija is stepping around to stop me getting to the back. So, as I try to move him down that way, as I move to the back, he keeps stepping around.

[00:46:28] Then I'm going to trap the leg, [00:46:30] grip onto the far leg, modified X guard. Push him away and start to stand up.[00:46:40] [00:46:50] [00:47:00] [00:47:10] [00:47:20] [00:47:30]

[00:47:34] So a very brief overview of guard retention. As I said, we've got an instruction on this, but I just want to give you an idea of [00:47:40] how this fits into the game. So generally, I'm going to be looking for feet on biceps. If I can get feet on biceps, this means it's harder for Mikhail to control my legs. He's going to have to [00:47:50] clear my feet from the biceps.

[00:47:52] to then start to get control and be able to pass. So with retention, we're looking to get feet on biceps and I'm often scouring with my [00:48:00] hands trying to find a leg. Once I attach to that leg, that's going to give me a chance to attach into my open guard and start my open guard offense. [00:48:10] So, my feet are here working.

[00:48:13] As soon as Mikal makes an angle, then I'm going to put my elbow in. Elbow to the mat on the opposite side, because you never want to get [00:48:20] turned away. You don't want to get tilted away from your opponent like this. So by putting my elbow on the mat, and usually supporting my leg, now when Mikhail tries to turn me this way, that's difficult.[00:48:30]

[00:48:30] The other thing that's really important is that we're framing, making distance. When you frame with your hand, outstretched hand, usually on the bicep, or, uh, can be down near the elbow, [00:48:40] or up towards the shoulder. You have to adjust that depending on what your opponent's leading with. keeping your arm close to your leg so they can't arm lock you.

[00:48:47] Once you have this with an [00:48:50] outstretched arm you've usually got plenty of room to start to pummel your feet back to the biceps and look to start to set up your attachment to your opponent's legs. Okay so we're [00:49:00] working for feet on biceps when our opponent clears that we're framing elbow to the mat supporting our leg usually doing a movement such as a high pummel bringing our leg up [00:49:10] over and through back into control and looking to regain control here.

[00:49:16] If Mikhail starts to go through the legs, that's actually [00:49:20] where we start to go for our reverse de la Hiva position. So we're already able to then immediately get our game going. If they go for a cross knee through position, making sure we always frame [00:49:30] both shoulders first, keeping distance with the shoulders so that legs can get in position and then either use that to recover or attack.

[00:49:39] We do not [00:49:40] want to accept the headquarters position. Mikhail steps over my leg here, and I'm not in position to where I can get reverse delahibba. This is a defensive position. to think about [00:49:50] retention here, not trying to attack from here. So we're going to be, again, not wanting to get tilted away, putting our elbow to the ground, framing, okay, making as much distance [00:50:00] as possible, and pummeling our feet back in front, where we can start to set our open guard up.

[00:50:06] The last type of pass is if Mikhail goes under the legs. [00:50:10] From here, I need to drop my hips down, head to the mat, change my posture so my legs are now wide. And if I can, I'm going to be framing, making [00:50:20] room to pummel my foot underneath an armpit. This kills the under the legs passes. Anytime Mikhail goes under the legs, if I'm able to find room to pummel under a shoulder, [00:50:30] I can then pummel back, start working back to an open guard, and that's it.

[00:50:34] Maybe a K guard. Okay, so In summary, our opponent might put retention [00:50:40] We want to keep our feet in front of the biceps whenever they're cleared be ready to frame your they go around Frame the ground and your leg and work to pummel back in [00:50:50] front if they go through with a cross knee through I'm gonna be framing pummeling our feet back.

[00:50:55] We've got our reverse delahevo attacks If he goes into headquarters, then we want [00:51:00] to make sure we stop our hips get turning pummel that leg back and if it goes under head to the mat hips to the mat walk backwards if you need to and you want to pummel your foot [00:51:10] underneath the armpit making sure you've killed that pass before you start attaching to your attack.[00:51:20] [00:51:30]

[00:51:32] So we're now going to go through against an opponent who's on their knees we're going to go through a position called k guard right and i'm actually going to teach [00:51:40] it from the closed guard to start how we get there from closed guard But you can do the same thing from Open Gap, alright? So, [00:51:50] If I start in Closed Gap, I'm going to frame Mikhail's shoulders here and put my shins in front like this, okay?

[00:51:59] So you can see my [00:52:00] knees stop him closing the gap if he tries to go forward on me. My knees have blocked it, okay? My hands and my feet lifting up are going to stop him moving away. [00:52:10] Right, so we've got this from closed, we're basically going to force an open guard by pushing the shoulders and getting our legs in front like this.

[00:52:18] From here, I need to [00:52:20] move my hips away so that I can get my foot on the outside and knee on the inside. Right now, my foot's on the outside, but my knee's also on the outside. If I move my hips away [00:52:30] like this, so by turning on the side, extending with this top leg, I've moved my hips away. See, now my knee has gone to the inside, foot [00:52:40] on the outside.

[00:52:41] This is the K guard position, right? So again, from the closed guard, frame the shoulders, knees and [00:52:50] shins in front, hips move away. I can reach underneath the leg, and connect my hands together. All right, so [00:53:00] foot on the outside, knee on the inside, hands clasped. I want to pull Mikhail's knee up onto my, onto my stomach.

[00:53:08] To do that, I'm [00:53:10] going to off balance him away with my legs and pull his knee up here. All right, this exposes the back of Mikhail's [00:53:20] knee. So I can start to attack a leg lock, right? So by, by off balancing and pulling the knee up, the back of his knees exposed, I can shoot [00:53:30] my right leg through this gap. Do you want to just turn around this way a bit?

[00:53:34] That way. So I'm going to take my leg, feed [00:53:40] it through and force Mikhail's knee to the ground. locking my feet together. This is the backside 50 50 position. [00:53:50] From here, lifting the foot in the air, I can attack the heel hook. So from the closed guard, I'm going to frame the [00:54:00] shoulders, get my shins in front, moving my hips out to the side so that my knee drops down and foot's on the outside.

[00:54:08] I reach under the leg, [00:54:10] connect my hands, Pull the knee to my stomach as I off balance with my legs. Make sure my knee pokes through behind as you take them across. Make sure you're not doing this. [00:54:20] Okay. Knee stays under. From here, I'm going to swing my leg over, force the knee down to the ground, lift the foot up, [00:54:30] and take a heel hook from here.[00:54:40] [00:54:50] [00:55:00] [00:55:10] [00:55:20] [00:55:30]

[00:55:35] From an open guard, the way we get that same move going is I'm going to grip [00:55:40] the back of Mikhail's elbow here, hip escape so that my foot goes on the outside and knee goes to the inside. And I put my top leg under the [00:55:50] armpit here, right? Once I'm here, I can reach under the armpit. under the leg and get that same entry going.

[00:55:57] Okay. So again, [00:56:00] my car is kneeling. I put my foot to the mat, my right foot, I move my hips across until my foot's outside the hip. Knee is inside, right? [00:56:10] My top leg goes here and to make sure I can get my foot there, I have to make sure that his elbow is not locked to his hip. So I'm going to grip his elbow here and pull it open.[00:56:20]

[00:56:20] Shoot to the side, get my top leg in, And I'm going to reach under the hips, pull the knee on top of my stomach, and continue [00:56:30] that sequence.[00:56:40]

[00:56:47] Now we're dealing with a standing opponent. It's much [00:56:50] harder to go for K guard when our opponent's standing. You can do it, but the thing is, it's much easier for Mikhail to push a leg off. I'm trying to put my foot [00:57:00] next to the hip. He can clear that leg. a lot easier than he could before. So it's generally better now against a standing opponent if we just try to go for De La Riva.

[00:57:09] We're going to attach a [00:57:10] hook to just the line of the knee here. All right, so instead of going up foot on the hip, we're just going to put our knee pretty much in front of our opponent's knee [00:57:20] and grip onto their ankle. All right, my knee comes in front of the knee. I grab the ankle and my right foot, we can put it in the bicep or often just [00:57:30] next to.

[00:57:31] Our opponent's hip here is good, so it's just on the outside, wedged in next to the hip. I want to have good pressure pushing [00:57:40] backwards. So my knee actually pushes backwards like this, stopping Mikhail coming forward with that leg. Okay, so I'm actively extending my knee, putting pressure [00:57:50] into Mikhail's knee.

[00:57:51] Once we're here, I'm going to start moving towards the back. The main thing you should do when you get to De La Riva, This is basically the Dela Heva position. I don't have what we [00:58:00] call a Dela Heva hook yet. I'll show that in a moment, but my main movement is to start to move towards the back and to try to pull Mikhail's hips down towards the ground.

[00:58:09] So I'm [00:58:10] going to sit up, put my hand to the ground, pressure with my knee and start scooting to the side. From here, I should be able to get what's called a Dela [00:58:20] Heva hook. Let's have a look at that from the other angle now. So you see my knee. Now pulls closer to my chest and my foot hooks [00:58:30] the thigh. This hook helps me to knock Mikhail's weight this way.

[00:58:37] Okay, so you'll notice from front on it's very hard to [00:58:40] get that hook and I kind of have to open a lot of space. When I sit forward and scoot around a little bit, now I can get a good hook, a good De La Riva hook. All right, I'm not [00:58:50] extending to the far leg yet. I'm keeping it on the near leg. My hand's gonna pull, and I'm gonna try and knock Mikhail this way.

[00:58:58] Okay, so I'm trying to off balance [00:59:00] him down towards his hip here. So against someone who's standing, I'm going to grip behind the knee with my inside hand, scoot my hips in, [00:59:10] put my knee to Mikhail's knee, grab the ankle, and get this De La Riva position, putting my foot next to his hip. I sit forward, scoot myself [00:59:20] around, and then I get my De La Riva hook, Grip onto the knee and I want to knock Mikhail's weight this way What he's gonna do for this first one is actually [00:59:30] just step backwards to keep his balance So as I take him this way, he steps back.

[00:59:33] Okay, just step close for now. So yeah, cool. So he steps close and backwards [00:59:40] I Then I'm going to reach to this leg Hook the leg and start to move towards his back here All right, so you can see now when I grab this far [00:59:50] leg when Mikhail comes around to face me again Holding this leg stops him pivoting.

[00:59:54] When he can step that leg free, he can come around to face me. So I can hook the leg [01:00:00] and I can grab the leg. Two ways of stopping him pivoting around to face me again. Once more. I'm standing, I sit forward, [01:00:10] I lean to the side, and I pull Mikhail towards me. I grab this leg, hook, and I pummel my right foot from being [01:00:20] on the outside to behind this leg.

[01:00:22] Okay, grip onto the hips and move behind towards the back. Once I've got these [01:00:30] two hooks, I want to be reaching to the hips, pulling Mikhail's hips in and extending my feet so I can start to take the back from him. So I'm going to [01:00:40] reach to the knee, pull my hips in so I can grip onto the ankle, pressure with my knee, sit forward, [01:00:50] turn the corner and get my Dela Hepa hook.

[01:00:52] From here, I'm going to be knocking Mikhail to the side. He steps, I'm going to hook the leg, grip it, and then I want to [01:01:00] pummel my foot behind. So I've got two hooks here. I want to bring my hips behind Mikhail, grab onto his hips, pull him in, extend, [01:01:10] and look to take the bag.[01:01:20] [01:01:30] [01:01:40] [01:01:50] [01:02:00] [01:02:10] [01:02:20]

[01:02:20] When I try to go around the corner, like we did before, as I'm looking to get this hook, a lot of the time, Mikhail will follow me and step forward. Okay. So every time I [01:02:30] try to get my angle, Mikhail steps around, right? So this time, so before I was trying to catch my left leg, I was trying to get my left leg.

[01:02:39] To [01:02:40] capture that leg. This time I'm gonna have my right leg capture the leg. So as Mikhail steps I'm gonna hook the leg and make him step wide. Okay, so see my knee hooked the knee and made [01:02:50] him step wide So I took my foot from usually next to the hip and as he steps over Make him step wide here. I keep that hook.

[01:02:59] I'm gonna grab [01:03:00] the leg by reaching underneath the calf And I'm going to go to something called Modified X Guard. So my right leg now, once I've grabbed that leg, I don't need to hook it anymore. [01:03:10] So my right leg goes to the near side leg. See my shin here is a bit of a frame to stop Mikhail moving towards me.[01:03:20]

[01:03:20] I put my foot behind my other foot, so you can see I've got my foot hooking at the knee here. My other foot comes on the other side of the knee. I'm going to push away [01:03:30] and start to stand up. So I want to knock Mikhail forward as I kick with my legs. His hands go to the mat. I start getting up, get up on my hands, [01:03:40] get up on my feet, and I can look to take the back.

[01:03:45] So again, I start trying to make my angle. I start trying to get my hook. [01:03:50] Mikhail steps around. I'm going to now hook, stretch him out, reach to that leg, and put my right knee across onto that knee leg that I was [01:04:00] initially attached to. From here, I put my feet together, push and get up on my hand at the same time.

[01:04:06] So as I extend my feet, I get up on my left hand [01:04:10] and I now have good base. If Mikhail tries to drive me backwards, my hand posting will stop that. I do a technical stand up by retracting my leg [01:04:20] and I'm up ready to take the back. So[01:04:30] [01:04:40] [01:04:50] [01:05:00]

[01:05:06] let's have a look now. At what we covered for our initial game [01:05:10] plan. So if we have a kneeling opponent, all we're going to do is look to get to K guard. Foot on the outside, knee on the inside. I'm going to [01:05:20] look to get my leg in position, look to get underneath the leg, pull the knee on my stomach, shoot through to backside 50 50, and attack the [01:05:30] heel hook.

[01:05:30] So we've got a heel hook finish. We can also attack this from closed guard by pushing on the shoulders, knees in front. Hips come out and get to that same [01:05:40] K guard position. If instead our opponent is standing, we have to have a different strategy. We're going to look to get to Delaheva. So [01:05:50] from Delaheva, I'm going to look to reach to the knee and take, put pressure on the knee, grab the ankle, try to get my angle first.

[01:05:57] So I start pushing off the ground with my hand. [01:06:00] and looking to get this hook. If I can, I want to off balance Mikhail so that he stands, stay up, so that he steps back. I can hook the leg, pummel [01:06:10] my foot behind, shoot my hips behind, and look to take the back from there. If Mikhail steps around to avoid me getting the angle, [01:06:20] I make him step wide, reach to the leg, change my legs, and go for the modified X guard sweep.

[01:06:27] So having options from K guard and Della Hiva. [01:06:30] now should set you up to begin to learn the rest of the game. So now I would encourage you if you're trying out that K guard offense or you're trying out that Dela Hiva [01:06:40] offense, if you go into the K guard or Dela Hiva section, you'll start to notice that people defend in certain ways and I've covered how to deal with someone who defends in that particular way.

[01:06:49] So you can start to get [01:06:50] more of the, the concepts behind how those positions work and all the counters and reactions from there. You also start to see For example, if someone starts to drop their knee as we go for the [01:07:00] modified X guard, that will lead us into the waiter position and you can start opening up to leg entanglements from there too.

[01:07:06] So this is a good starting point and will start to lead you into the [01:07:10] rest of your game. So[01:07:20]

[01:07:22] now I'm going to give you a very short summary of each of the positions we're covering, what the main entries are, and what the main options to [01:07:30] upgrade or finish are.

[01:07:36] K guard is the main option we go for against the opponent who [01:07:40] is kneeling or potentially they've still got one knee down. Okay, so we'll be looking to control this space. So I get my foot next to the hip. [01:07:50] I want my feet in from here working under the leg into the K guard position. Alright, so some other ways that we commonly get here is off guard retention.[01:08:00]

[01:08:00] As Kaya starts to pass around, I'll often start to frame, get my foot across, and then take that K guard position and start to turn that into an attack. [01:08:10] We can also get it when our opponent stands up by going to shallow K guard. Okay, so that's when I underhook the leg, free my knee down, and my foot on the outside of the leg.

[01:08:19] [01:08:20] Okay. gripping onto the leg. This is a variant of K guard where I've got my foot at the knee instead of my foot at the hip like before. Once we get into K [01:08:30] guard we've got a few options to attack. The main one is if the back of the knee is exposed we're going to chop the back of the knee down and get to backside 50 [01:08:40] 50 where we can look for the heel.

[01:08:43] When Kaya turns his knee out then we are going to want to It's going to be hard to get behind the knee. So we're going to [01:08:50] look for upgrades in position such as X guard. So if he's standing, I will go into X guard here, getting the leg on the shoulder. If Kaya was kneeling on his back leg, [01:09:00] then I would often look to pass the leg across into the 70 30 position.

[01:09:06] If Kaya is blocking my entry to his legs by being very upper body [01:09:10] heavy, then I'll often start to look to get into the prone armbar position and attack the arm.[01:09:20]

[01:09:20] We've got a standing opponent, then we're looking for De La Riva, that's our main choice of attack. Standing or if they're on combat base, which means one leg up and one leg down. So, I can [01:09:30] say standing, that's fine. So, from De La Riva, there's two options. Two main options to get here, first off, then we can either sit forward and be aggressive at [01:09:40] attaching to the leg and shooting ourselves in to the leg.

[01:09:43] Or again, we can be on guard retention. Pryor's trying to pass around and I'm looking to then grip onto [01:09:50] his leg as he's trying to control my legs and then I get my legs in position into De La Riva. So, two main options from here really. Oh, three actually. One is [01:10:00] to go to the modified to the shallow Kega, like we did before.

[01:10:04] All right. That's probably actually, that's the one I do if I can't get these other two [01:10:10] options to work. The first thing we should do is try to tilt them down and try and work towards the back. So I'm going to start trying to move around, try and get Kai's hips down [01:10:20] to the mat and then look to do the Garambola, okay?

[01:10:23] Look to take the back as his hips hit the mat. If we go back up, sometimes even it [01:10:30] just steps back and doesn't, and doesn't, uh, fall down. And we can look to take the back when he's standing into standing crab ride. So when Kai is circling around towards [01:10:40] me to prevent me getting towards the back, that's often a great time to do our other main attack from De La Riva, which is to look for the waiter position or modified X gap.

[01:10:49] So there, [01:10:50] we're going to make him step wide. If I can grip onto this leg, if he stays standing, they're modified X gap. Stretch him out, and I work to get up [01:11:00] for a sweep. What's more common against an advanced opponent, as you stretch them out as they follow, so Kaya steps around. As I reach here, he's gonna drop down to [01:11:10] this knee, prevent me from catching that leg for the modified X guard.

[01:11:14] Here, we will switch to the waiter guard position. So we've gone from De La [01:11:20] Riva to waiter, and upgrade in position. So in summary, our main options from De La Riva were two. work towards the back, try and get the hips to the mat, go for the berimbolo, [01:11:30] potentially go to the waiter if he's preventing that. So I've got a modified x guard, then he drops to his knee, we've got the waiter guard position, and we go back.

[01:11:39] And then the last one, [01:11:40] if you feel like you're stuck and you can't really get either of those going, we start looking to go shallow K guard and look to then use our K guard attack. [01:11:50] When our opponent goes for a cross knee through, so he's managed to take one of my legs, put it to inside leg positioning, that's [01:12:00] when we use reverse De La Riva, okay?

[01:12:02] So first off, we consider this a bit of a downgrade compared to the other guards we've covered so far. So two of our main ways of [01:12:10] upgrading position here are actually just to return to K guard or Riva. So if I'm able to, I'll often start to look to go back. Around the corner, get my De La [01:12:20] Riva hook and play with two feet on the outside.

[01:12:22] Or, I can potentially look to go for K guard on the far side leg. There are ways to get this on the near side leg [01:12:30] as well, but again, two feet on the outside, consider that an upgrade. From reverse De La Riva, we also have options if our opponent steps too far forward, then we can attach to that modified [01:12:40] X guard and start looking to attack sweeps from here.

[01:12:44] So the other main attack is actually to spin between our opponent's legs. Which is, uh, [01:12:50] from Reverse Delaheva, the invert. Uh, so, main attack would be just going back to Delaheva. But, the other option is, that we would consider our primary attack [01:13:00] is to spin through, and come out the back here. Okay? So now I'm in this standing crab row position, one of the finishing positions where we can work to take the back.

[01:13:08] So again, from Reverse [01:13:10] Delaheva, our main options are to recover back to Delaheva, or in towards Kegel. or potentially to spin [01:13:20] underneath for the attack.

[01:13:24] So

[01:13:28] the next position is [01:13:30] the waiter position. Okay, so we get here, predominantly we get here from De La Riva. Okay, so we go back, I've got De La Riva, I start to [01:13:40] hook this leg, reach for the leg, Kaia drops down on his knee, and I roll back into the waiter position. Okay, so this one, two major [01:13:50] options from the waiter.

[01:13:51] One is to go to a leg entanglement and the other is to go to the back. Okay, so I can attach the leg entanglement here and start working out into X guard, [01:14:00] potentially single leg X, potentially into 70 30 where we pass the leg across. The other one is that we spin [01:14:10] out towards the back. So because we're underneath our opponent, I can start to spin through and start to look and So [01:14:20] again, the way to go position, we usually get to it from De La Riva when our opponent drops their knee.

[01:14:26] And from here, we're usually looking to get to the legs, leg [01:14:30] entanglement, or to spin out and look to take the back.[01:14:40]

[01:14:41] For single leg X, we're gonna be playing it mostly with our foot on the inside as a hook and our knee nice and tight. One of the main ways we're gonna get here in this [01:14:50] series is from. the waiter position, okay? So, Kai's dropped to his knee, as I get to waiter, I can take the leg over the top and into single leg X.[01:15:00]

[01:15:00] Okay, uh, other ways we might get there is from K guard. Sometimes we get to K guard, scoot underneath, and we can get into single leg [01:15:10] X or, or X guard, which is basically when, so that single X is basically when I've got an overhook and I'm a little more attached to the near leg. and X guards [01:15:20] when I have an underhook on the leg and I tend to be more attached to the far leg.

[01:15:25] Generally, it's an upgrade to go from single leg X into X guard. So that's one of the [01:15:30] the main things you want to do when we get here is start to work into X guard. So two major attacks we're going to look for from single leg X and X guard. [01:15:40] One is two, sorry, three major attacks, um, getting up and sweeping.

[01:15:45] So if I can just off balance when I've got the leg on the shoulder or even with an overhook, better on [01:15:50] the shoulder again. If I can off balance and start to build my base up, I have great ability now to chase Kyler down for a takedown, okay? That's gonna be the main [01:16:00] thing, one of the main things we look for.

[01:16:01] If he's standing up and I get control of both legs, or I get the ability to tilt him backwards, we can start doing lumbar jack sweeps, [01:16:10] tilting the back to come on top.

[01:16:16] And the other option is to look to take the back, okay? If I can ever make this [01:16:20] leg light, I get the ability to now, Feed it across into 70 30, okay? This is starting to take us more towards the back and start to improve our position. [01:16:30] So in summary, single leg X, we mostly get here from the waiter or from something like K guard into X guard.

[01:16:38] It'd be an upgrade [01:16:40] if we go to X guard, okay? So I managed to go to X guard, I've improved my positioning and three main attack options, we can tilt them backwards, [01:16:50] okay? We can knock their weight down. So if I can start to get Kaya's hands to the mat, they start to get up. And if I can make this leg light, I can start feeding it [01:17:00] across my body, improve my position to 70 30.

[01:17:08] So we then have [01:17:10] our next set of positions, 50 50 and 70 30. Okay, so 50 50 is really when, see how I've got the line of Kaya's knee court [01:17:20] and he's also got my knee court, right? So We're kind of in a 50 50 position with our legs, although he's standing and I'm down. Okay. Then there's 70 30 where [01:17:30] I tend to have a hook and I tend to take my, my knee line free.

[01:17:34] So I've technically still got, got Kai's leg. I can attack his leg. I've usually threaded this [01:17:40] leg through. I can be on my right hip here, or I can be on my, my left, because we'll, as we'll see later, I'll be out here too. All right. So generally it's an [01:17:50] upgrade to go to 70 30 from 50 50. Alright, it's just a little safer on my own leg if I can start to drop down here and I still have many of the attacks, the attacks available.[01:18:00]

[01:18:00] To get here, one of the main ways is from K guard into backside 50 50 and our opponent spins through. Okay, we'll go back. [01:18:10] If I go K guard, I go into backside 50 50, Kaiya does a big backstep, I go into backside Alright, and we end [01:18:20] up in either, let's start getting up now, so we end up in either 50 50 from here.

[01:18:26] Okay, so it's just like a continuation of that. Other ways to get [01:18:30] here, through reverse delta heaver, so Kai comes for the knee cut, I extend and shoot my leg back underneath, [01:18:40] so I'm kind of inverting to get into the position. 70 30, we'll often get to from K guard as well, just by by passing the leg across, [01:18:50] okay?

[01:18:50] We get to here, I can pass the leg across the body, and now I have the 70 30 position. This can also be achieved from waiter or single leg X. [01:19:00] Again, we've got the leg, almost to the leg entanglement position, we just start to pass the leg across, and we're in this position. There are quite a few attacks you can do from here, I'm just going to cover a [01:19:10] few.

[01:19:10] two for now. Okay. Generally, if I'm on my right side, I'm going to look to invert and capture the heel. Okay. So from here, I'm going to be looking to [01:19:20] roll through, capture the heel hook in backside. If I'm on my left hip, it's a bit harder to capture the heel hook. Um, there is a [01:19:30] way, but usually I'm going to be looking to extend And start to stand up, looking to take the back or consolidate the sweep.[01:19:40]

[01:19:40] There is an option again to spin through though and look for the back to 50 50 finish. So in summary [01:19:50] from 50 50 and 70 30. If we're in 50 50, we're often looking to get to the 70 30 position against someone who's standing. From there, if we're on our right hip, we're [01:20:00] looking to invert through, attack the heel hook.

[01:20:02] If we get on our left hip. Then we're looking to either get up or start to through for the [01:20:10] backside 50 50 heel hook.

[01:20:18] So just the finishing positions now, [01:20:20] so backside 50 50, we're just going to go through the main single options for each of the finishing positions. Backside 50 50, we're looking for the [01:20:30] inside heel hook for the finish. Standing crab ride, so taking this leg across, we're going to be looking to pull our opponent standing.

[01:20:39] [01:20:40] and take the back. The bolo position, we would knock their opponent's hips down to the mat. We will be looking to take the back using the baron bolo. So coming up over the top, rolling through [01:20:50] and looking to take the back. And the prone armbar, well, is we're going to be looking to finish with the prone armbar.

[01:20:59] We'll be [01:21:00] looking to kick our opponent's leg out and start to attack that arm. Okay. So there are finishing positions. We're leading into those positions from the guards we're playing.[01:21:10] [01:21:20]

[01:21:20] An important movement in this series is the invert. And for some people trying to learn to invert can actually be quite difficult, especially if you're not flexible. So, [01:21:30] um, first off I'll say, if you're not flexible, then maybe spend a bit of time stretching before you start doing the inverted movements.

[01:21:37] You want to make sure you've got the right range of [01:21:40] motion so you don't actually get injured. Okay. So a good test for this is, um, If I roll back, if I can touch my feet to the mat, so see my feet touching the mat here, and I can lift [01:21:50] my head up off the ground, that means my neck is not taking strength. If I'm not flexible enough, and I'm just gonna kind of do it off angle so I can keep talking, but [01:22:00] uh, let's say I'm not flexible enough and I have to start putting weight through my head, so I can't actually lift my head up to get my feet to the ground, or even if I can't get my feet to the ground, Then that means when [01:22:10] I try to invert, if someone stacks me, that could put a lot of pressure on my neck, which is probably the, we have to be careful of our whole spine, but the neck is probably the one that we need to be particularly careful with, [01:22:20] with the invert.

[01:22:20] Although we still need to be worried about our lower back as well. Okay. So, um, ideally what you do is you get good flexible hamstrings. Okay. The better [01:22:30] my hamstrings, which is the ability to pull my knee to my chest and my foot away from my butt. The more I can go this way. The quicker my foot can hit the mat, and my hips don't have to [01:22:40] lift, I get stacked less, okay?

[01:22:42] The worse my hamstring, the more my foot's gonna be bent like this, the more my back and my neck get jammed up when I start to get stacked, okay? [01:22:50] So, One of the main things we can do is stretch our hamstrings. So knees straight, feet back, because this is actually the same sort of posture that we're talking about.

[01:22:58] My toes coming back to hit the [01:23:00] mat. Okay, so toes back, legs straight, trying to reach as far as we can this way, and try to build up over time. Good hamstring flexibility.[01:23:10]

[01:23:14] So for the invert movement ourself, we need to actually get good at the movement for the invert. I'm going to [01:23:20] Roll to my side a little bit. I'm going to tuck my elbow in. It's really important your elbow is in. If your elbow is open, it's going to stop you. It's like a block to [01:23:30] stop my shoulders and my head going in.

[01:23:31] Okay, so my elbow has to be tucked by my side. When I roll forward, I actually want my elbow behind my back like that. Okay, so you can see [01:23:40] it's gone from elbow in front to elbow behind my back. Okay, so I'm starting to turn. On my side and putting my bottom leg, [01:23:50] the toes on the mat like this. Okay. So as you put your toes on the mat, your hips start to lift and I want you to take your head [01:24:00] at this point.

[01:24:00] So shoulders gone down. I'll put my elbow behind. I start to lift my hips and bring my head towards my legs. Okay. As I bring my head [01:24:10] towards my legs, I push off these toes to bring my hips up. Like this, okay. So you'll see that's going to take me pretty much so that both [01:24:20] shoulders end up flat on the ground.

[01:24:21] Okay, so again, I'm on one shoulder. As I lift my hips up and my head goes in, I have to be looking up. Okay, so like, look [01:24:30] up at the roof. Okay, not, like, not hip escape. Okay, I'm not pushing my hips away, but I'm pushing my hips up, and my head's going through, and I get both [01:24:40] shoulders on the mat. Okay, so I'm basically half at the halfway point here.

[01:24:44] I'm just going to do the exact opposite movement now, but continuing through. So I'm going to put my toes on the mat. [01:24:50] Elbow is going to come from behind to in front as I roll to my back. And then I can do the same thing the other side. If you look at it from this side, so I [01:25:00] turned to the side, bring my elbow behind my back, bring my shoulder forward, toes on the mat, hips come up.

[01:25:07] My head comes in. And I go to my [01:25:10] shoulders, right? From here, rolling back through, elbow ends up back in front. I've come out to the other side. All right. So this is a drill you [01:25:20] should do and practice. Um, probably the biggest mistake people make is that they, they go like hip escape or that they get here and [01:25:30] they kind of roll through letting the hips drop.

[01:25:32] Okay. What you want to do, Is, keep your hips up and over, okay, so keep your [01:25:40] feet close to the ground, roll your hips from one side to the other, and then start to drop through onto the other [01:25:50] [01:26:00] side.

[01:26:01] [01:26:10] [01:26:20] We're now working on the K guard position, which is really the main way we attack when someone is [01:26:30] kneeling in particular. And actually, even if they're standing, we go for K guard. It's probably one of the best ways to enter into some of these leg entanglements that we want. Okay, so let me just show you what K guard is [01:26:40] and a general outline of what we want to do from there.

[01:26:44] So, K guard is where We're defining it as essentially where I've got my [01:26:50] foot on the outside of the hip and my knee on the inside and I've connected my hands together like so. Okay, so one hand's gone underneath the leg [01:27:00] and I've connected to that leg. Okay, so we'll be covering quite a lot on how to enter into here.

[01:27:07] There's a lot of ways we can get to K guard and [01:27:10] also once we get to K guard What are our options from here, right? So usually when I get K guard and my knee underneath here, I want to start to work towards pulling the knee [01:27:20] onto my chest, which gives me a few options to attack from here. I can swing my leg over into the backside 50 50 position and start to [01:27:30] work for leg locks or even just to the 50 50 position from here.

[01:27:38] I can shoot my foot [01:27:40] underneath, turn and end up in something like this. an X gap,

[01:27:47] or I can work to pummel the [01:27:50] leg across my body to end up in this 70 30 position, which again could expose Mish towards attacking leg locks, [01:28:00] or can help me start to set up back takes or, or sweeps. So we're going to cover it in two different We're going to [01:28:10] have entries. So all the different ways we can look to enter into the K guard and get to this position here.

[01:28:17] And then the second section will be on. Once we get here, [01:28:20] how do we get the leg onto our stomach? And then how do we attack to get to improve our positioning from the K guard itself. Each of these sections will first [01:28:30] go through some of the relevant concepts. So the concepts related to entries. And then the specific details on the ways we can enter and same with the, [01:28:40] uh, the offense.

[01:28:41] Once we get to the K guard, what are the concepts, the things we need to, concepts and strategy, like how we approaching this, and then how, what are the actual individual [01:28:50] techniques and details we need from there. Followed by troubleshooting and dealing with common issues you might face. One thing that will be [01:29:00] covered in the entry section as well, is how we can link this with upper body attacks.

[01:29:05] Often when we're going towards the legs, our opponent starts to expose their arm or their [01:29:10] upper body, and we can start to attack their upper body and try to finish with submissions there.[01:29:20]

[01:29:21] So why a K guard? Like, why do I like this particular type of guard? One of the main reasons is you're quite safe. You go for [01:29:30] your offense and if it doesn't work, you're still in quite good positioning to just go again. Which is quite different to some of the other guards people tend to play. And that I used to favor more, as [01:29:40] opposed to now, I tend to favor more for the defense.

[01:29:42] So, because I'm putting both feet on the outside, like this, if I try to attach to the leg, and for example, [01:29:50] Misha sprawls back and I miss his leg, I still have my feet, he's still between my legs, which means I can recover back to decent position quite easily, alright. As soon [01:30:00] as you start putting your feet on the inside, something like a butterfly or um, a half guard, you can be very effective from these particular types of guards, but When I start trying to attack from here, [01:30:10] Maybe try to elevate me.

[01:30:11] If it sprawls out on that, often I can get put in a bad position like this. Obviously there's ways you can go about stopping that, but generally it's a higher risk position to play from the [01:30:20] inside than, than by having my feet on the outside like so.[01:30:30]

[01:30:30] So what is an upgrade from K guard or where does it fit in to everything else? If you can get to the K guard position, it's obviously a good [01:30:40] position to get to, but it would be an upgrade to get towards a leg entanglement. So something like single leg X 50 [01:30:50] 50 or obviously if we can get to a position where we can start to attack some sort of heel hook like a backside 50 50.[01:31:00]

[01:31:01] Other positions such as from other positions such as De La Riva, it would be an upgrade generally to get into the K guard position from De La Riva or, or reverse De [01:31:10] La Riva. I'm a little bit further away from even getting into a leg entanglement. So if we can upgrade into position like Keiko, that's generally a little closer and a little [01:31:20] further along the chain.

[01:31:27] So what are the ways people could counter our [01:31:30] entry? Perhaps one of the most common ones is a cross face, a cross face Mish here, he tries to reach to my leg and it's very hard for him to pull himself to attach to the [01:31:40] leg. So we're going to want to know how to deal with that. The cross face, that often goes hand in hand with a sprawl.

[01:31:45] Okay. So even if Mish grabs my leg, if I cross face or I can lock his head [01:31:50] and start to sprawl back, I can often remove myself from his grip. So we want to know how to deal with someone who's sprawling. Um, and just on that, so say cross face, also it can be just [01:32:00] like a, a push or a block. Some people kind of push your head.

[01:32:02] We want to know how to deal with that as well as the cross face. It can be slightly different. You get some people who tend to sit back more, so. [01:32:10] When I'm up, off my heels, there's actually a gap to reach underneath and grip the leg. You get some people who, as you're trying to enter, will be right back here, and when Mish tries to [01:32:20] reach underneath, that's going to be difficult.

[01:32:21] Usually when they're doing this, they're more focused on blocking or trying to get their head back in position. So we want to know how to get someone off their [01:32:30] heels to attack. You get some people who Step up. Okay, so Misha's going for here and I try to, I want to stop him attaching. I might start putting [01:32:40] my knee in front, trying to disengage my leg.

[01:32:43] I kind of like pushing him away with my leg as I pull my own leg back, making it harder to reach that leg. Okay, so [01:32:50] you will get people going into what we call combat base here. So one leg up, one leg down, and there are some options regardless of attack or switch to other guards when they do that. You might get [01:33:00] some people who actually stand up and try to push your leg down.

[01:33:03] To prevent you from having a foot along the hip. Okay, so again, if I notice niche early is going for it, you might get some [01:33:10] people who start trying to pin your leg towards the ground. You want to know what to do in the scenario like that. Some people will try to go under your legs. Niche is trying to go under my leg [01:33:20] if I'm unsuccessful and I can pull his leg up and get underneath his legs.

[01:33:24] He can't really attach his knee to my hip anymore. He wants to kind of jam his knee under my hip kegar. [01:33:30] And if I've done a good job at this. I can pull his legs up, stop that, and potentially try to pass. Lastly, you'll get some people who try to push your legs away. Sometimes they [01:33:40] push the far leg.

[01:33:41] Sometimes they try to push the near leg forward. Usually like with their hips coming forward, they're trying to clear your legs out of the way. We're[01:33:50]

[01:33:58] getting into entries now. [01:34:00] Our general sequence here is to get our foot past the hip first. So we're usually looking to get our foot past the hip. [01:34:10] And get around the corner like this. We are then usually looking to either reach under the leg or pummel our leg. It can be one or the other first. Either one's [01:34:20] fine.

[01:34:20] So if, if the leg is available, I will reach for that. And then I'll often pummel my top look, top leg second, or sometimes the leg iss not available. [01:34:30] I'll be pummeling my leg first and trying to reach for the leg second. Okay, you want to make sure you are clearing access. to get to your opponent's leg. So [01:34:40] we will be talking a lot about how to deal with this, this arm that can block, you know, block me getting towards the leg or potentially cross face.

[01:34:47] Okay. So we will cover that, but we want [01:34:50] as a general rule, we're looking to get the foot past the hip first, come on out leg high second, then all get under the leg second. And [01:35:00] we end up with both of these. We then look to pull our opponent onto us and pull their knee up onto our stomach.[01:35:10]

[01:35:12] A really important thing to, to note and to do is make sure your foot goes just past the hip [01:35:20] like this. Right. Actually, sometimes it will track up to the armpit. We'll talk about that a little later, but for now, just past the hip. Right. So what I want or why I want to do that is my knee [01:35:30] ends up on the inside of Misha's knee and my foot is on the outside.

[01:35:35] Now, so you can see here, this is the positioning I want [01:35:40] because. I don't want Mish to be able to back away or peel my leg down. Now, here we go again. If my foot's too far through, it's actually [01:35:50] easier for him to push that down and get a hold of. But then when it's kind of jammed at his hip, try and grip that.

[01:35:55] It's actually harder to get at when it's just hooked at the hip. It's also a [01:36:00] smaller lever, okay. The more it's out here, it's a bigger lever. And actually my knee is, the more my foot comes out, the more my knee is not dropping between the legs. I cannot enter towards the [01:36:10] legs if my knee is over this side.

[01:36:12] If I try to enter the legs, it's very easy for me to just sprawl into this space. I'm wanting my knee to drop [01:36:20] inside, like this. So, I'm really facing my hips slightly to the ground for this bottom leg. My knee is wedging underneath, like so. Because [01:36:30] as I start to, uh, pull in here, I want to keep driving that knee through And later on you'll see that knee helps lift Misha's leg up.

[01:36:39] Okay, [01:36:40] again, something that if you don't have that and your leg's here, you're going to really struggle to get a good positioning with your Kegel. So, taking account of that, you'll also see some people step on [01:36:50] the hip. This blocks me from moving forward. Okay, my own foot makes it hard to get in at Misha's leg because I'm kind of stomping, making space.

[01:36:58] I want to be a bit closer and [01:37:00] deeper. I want my foot just past the hip here. Okay, I'm a little deeper. And my knee is easier to drop to the ground. Very hard and difficult to drop my knee inside Mish's legs if I step on [01:37:10] the hip. So we want to actually go just past the hip here. Occasionally I see when I teach this, people putting their foot on the wrong side.

[01:37:16] Okay, make sure it's not on this side when you do your K guard. It wants to be on the [01:37:20] far hip. Now, when you're looking for this, I don't really want to be front on for Mish. I want to be on an angle so I can invert underneath. So [01:37:30] it's not When I'm moving for this, it's not like this, okay, this is not so good.

[01:37:34] I want to hip out, not just to the side, but close to Mish. So I want to be [01:37:40] like this, okay, so my hips have come right out this side, and, and towards Mish, it makes it easy to put my knee on the ground, and start hooking, and get in good position. [01:37:50] And, so my foot's in really good position here, and I'm ready to invert underneath Mish's body, okay, so I'm ready to start the spin here.

[01:37:57] Good.[01:38:00]

[01:38:05] Now, a common theme, I'm going to get into a very important thing I want people to [01:38:10] understand is how I'm going to use my top leg. So I've got the leg on the bottom side. Usually you've got a leg that's trying to hook around the [01:38:20] hip, uh, or there's some other things we can do with that, but so that would be my left leg in this scenario, but my top leg here is actually really important.

[01:38:29] Okay. And it's going to be [01:38:30] important. in the entry part as well as in the offense part from Kega. So that's why I'm going to kind of talk about that now because it will cover it for both the entries and the [01:38:40] the offense section. Okay, so this leg often what I'm trying to do often what I'm trying to do is get this foot [01:38:50] on the inside of Mish's shoulder here.

[01:38:53] Okay, I'm, I want it so if Mish wants to push my leg away he doesn't have the ability to do that. If Misha's arm [01:39:00] is on the inside of my leg, he can push and block and prevent me getting access to his legs. Okay, so, anytime we're here, I'm looking, he's blocking my [01:39:10] leg, I'm looking usually to pummel my foot inside and hook the armpit.

[01:39:15] I will talk about why it's very, very difficult for your opponent to leg lock you here a little bit [01:39:20] later. So, you might be worried about that at first, but trust me, you know how to deal with that, it's not really an issue. Okay. So I want, this is, I want this foot here because it's hard for Mish to [01:39:30] get back inside that leg.

[01:39:31] I can track him forward. It works as a frame. If Mish tries to pressure in, I can use my knee, kind of like a knee shield, to frame him. But I [01:39:40] can also pull him back out towards me. He's trying to back away. I can pull him with my foot, pulling my knee to my chest, to get his weight forward. This is going to be important when I want to start [01:39:50] to off balance.

[01:39:50] I kind of want to pull him at me. Whereas if he's trying to pressure into me, I can be framing and that's going to work too as well. I can also [01:40:00] prevent Mish from retreating with this. See how I'm hooked behind his shoulder? Mish is backing away and can slow down or potentially stop Mish [01:40:10] from retreating.

[01:40:10] So I get access to his legs and he can't continually move his legs away. It gives me space to invert underneath. If my leg gets collapsed like this, I can't actually spin [01:40:20] and invert and get to the leg. You can see I've got no access right now. This leg plays a very large role actually in giving me space to spin under.

[01:40:28] The entry to the K guard is [01:40:30] kind of a partial invert. I want to be like, coming here. So, by having this space and keeping Mish's shoulders up, I get space to spin [01:40:40] underneath and start to attack. So on that, we want to be keeping our leg high. We don't want to be putting the knee shield here. It really should be like your foot here is hooking [01:40:50] behind the shoulder.

[01:40:52] One last thing, we often want to kick up with our shin. Sometimes I can use it to change sides. Having my leg high like this, I'm going to be trying to [01:41:00] pull Mish forward. Sometimes I can't get access to this side. I can kick up, straighten and allow myself to turn on the other side. By kicking up, I'm [01:41:10] preventing.

[01:41:10] Mish from pulling away and allows me to rotate around and collapse down towards the other side to attack. Okay, so we're using our knee shield [01:41:20] a lot as a frame to pull, to, to get our opponent forward, to push them back, to elevate them upwards and potentially to change [01:41:30] sides as well.

[01:41:36] Next thing I want to talk about, I don't want Mish to occupy this space [01:41:40] between my knees and my shoulder. It's going to be very hard to get to the legs. If that occurs. So if you want to, Gimish gets into this position here, I'm going to really struggle [01:41:50] to spin under to get to the leg. Okay. So I need, as I said, I need to do a bit, a little bit of an invert to get to the leg.

[01:41:55] So I need to be protecting this space. I don't want, we're not going to want the cross [01:42:00] face here. So I'm going to be blocking that arm getting at my head and a lot of it's going to come from this top leg. Okay. So anytime I lose positioning with this leg, Okay. I'll often be [01:42:10] framing, keeping the shoulders away.

[01:42:12] If he does close the gap, I frame with my elbow, frame with my shoulders, sorry, frame with my hands on his shoulders, thumb underneath, fingers on the other side, and [01:42:20] try to pummel my foot back in. So I've got that, that knee shield and that hook. Okay, now that this space is free for me, I can have access to [01:42:30] curl in, right, to get towards the leg.

[01:42:32] That's what I need. So make sure you're not dropping your knee shields too low. Don't let your feet extend too far away from your [01:42:40] chest. Here it's easy for me to block as I come forward. I still want to be somewhat compact, so as I'm doing my entry, you see, my knee is close to [01:42:50] my shoulder. It's hard to get into this space, right?

[01:42:52] If you're extending your feet out, trying to get the position in, you're really going to give your opponent a chance to control.[01:43:00]

[01:43:04] Another strategy to think about is preventing your opponent from retreating. [01:43:10] Okay, so, it's, if you think about the foot across the hip, which is important, especially in initial positioning, or at least to have my feet on the outside, [01:43:20] this foot doesn't really stop Mish moving away. So if Mish wants to run backwards, he can disengage from the position.

[01:43:26] So sometimes if that's all I've got and I start reaching for [01:43:30] the leg, there's nothing that stops him from just backing out. You often want to focus a lot more at first. Obviously I need my legs in good position to stay safe. So if [01:43:40] my feet weren't in position, then he could start to close the gap. That's it.

[01:43:43] That's a real problem. I don't want it to come forward. He usually doesn't want to come forward when I've got my feet in position. [01:43:50] Um, and, and often it is also hard when you're, you know, legs are outside and not in good position to then change to back to an outside position at will. Okay, [01:44:00] so we want to have a feeding position first, but I want to stop retreat is almost my second thing I'm thinking about.

[01:44:06] I now don't want Mish to be able to move away. So I'm hooking the [01:44:10] armpit with my foot. We talked about that already, but the armpits are really what we're, we're looking for to stop the retreat because there's not much I can do on his legs to help with this. Sometimes I will even [01:44:20] reinforce that with a grip here.

[01:44:21] Of my hand behind the armpit, right? So now, if Mish runs away now, I'm really attached, and it's actually going to start pulling me underneath. Okay, so I feel like my [01:44:30] leg's long enough, sometimes I reach over this armpit. Often what I'm looking to get is actually my right hand underneath, okay? This is getting me further around the [01:44:40] corner, towards the leg, and also, uh, retreat now.

[01:44:44] That's like backwards. It lets me follow him here, okay? It's hard for him to fully move away from [01:44:50] me. Sometimes even as we're going, I'll be working from my arm to have my, my knee there and even reinforce that holding the arm. So [01:45:00] Mitch tries to pull that arm back. He can't. I've really exposed this armpit to leg connection.

[01:45:06] Try to move this leg away from me. Can only go so far, not [01:45:10] far enough, but I can still reach. As I said earlier, initially you might even kick upwards to help to prevent them moving away as we, as we change sides. [01:45:20] My inside leg as well will sometimes change to the armpit instead of the, instead of hooking the hip.

[01:45:26] Okay, this is if I really want to stop the retreat. So if I know Mish is trying [01:45:30] to run away, sometimes I bring this foot behind the armpit and perform a little bit of an invert. I can't kick it. This has got not very much tension, right Mish? So you can kind of move back on that. But [01:45:40] if I turn a bit, now I'm back heeling against his armpit, okay, trying to run away.

[01:45:45] I can keep good pressure and start to expose the, the leg. Alright, [01:45:50] so, uh, in summary, our arms coming behind the armpit, behind the armpit, my chin coming behind the armpit, my shin and ankle behind the armpit, and [01:46:00] potentially even my, my knee behind the armpit. Okay, so this is often one of the first things we look to get to make sure they can't retreat and we get good access.

[01:46:08] to come and attach to the [01:46:10] leg.[01:46:20] [01:46:30] [01:46:40] [01:46:50] [01:47:00] [01:47:10] [01:47:20] [01:47:30] [01:47:40] [01:47:50] [01:48:00]

[01:48:00] Another important strategy or concept is I kind of want Mish to turn the side onto me while he's, see how he's kind of in front of me here. It is more [01:48:10] difficult to get to the leg. If you can turn your head all the way over there, the leg's going to be very accessible. Okay. So one thing I'm trying to do is often [01:48:20] off balance mesh and turn him this way to make that leg exposed, or pull myself around that corner, like so, so that I get access to the leg and to this [01:48:30] arm.

[01:48:36] Talked about getting your hips out to the side, bit more about, when we're talking about the [01:48:40] leg position, I want to talk about it for the invert now, because I think that's important. There is this, somewhat of an invert action that we want to do, and [01:48:50] generally, the more my hips are square on, It's going to be harder to spin underneath, my own leg gets jammed by, by Misha's leg.

[01:48:58] I'm trying to pull it underneath, it's difficult. [01:49:00] So by having my knee on the inside, this lifting my hips up action, the invert is really just like my hips lifting up on my shoulder, hips up, [01:49:10] knee down and curling my hips towards Misha now. So I've brought myself closer and maintained frames. This is very difficult to do [01:49:20] from a square on position.

[01:49:21] Thank you. Like this. So we're aiming to have our hips out, up on our shoulder, bringing our hips in, and then on my [01:49:30] shoulder rolling back through, I can start to attach to the Kegel. An added advantage, which we'll look at later, by getting out to the side, if [01:49:40] Mish does start to clear this leg, often I can put my foot to the ground and spin under my own body.

[01:49:46] So, okay, keep my leg up, spin under my own body, and I start to [01:49:50] get access to the Fallen. We talked about getting the hips out first, and then getting Kegel. There is one other way you might approach it. You'll see this a little [01:50:00] bit from, for example, from reverse delta heaver, or from the combat based position, and sometimes even from against a knee leg opponent, where you'll sit up, reach to the [01:50:10] leg first, and use that grip on the leg to then get your hips out.

[01:50:15] So usually it's hips out first and then we work underneath the leg, but occasionally [01:50:20] it's going to be sitting forward, reaching under the leg and hips coming out. Second, what it's not is leaning my head to the side as I [01:50:30] reach for the leg. Usually from here, this exposes the cross face.[01:50:40]

[01:50:40] Next one I'll talk about is just whether you attach or not. both hands to the leg or one. So when you grab the leg, now you've made it difficult for your opponent to retreat. It's hard for [01:50:50] Mish to get that leg back unless he cross faces. Okay. If he cross faces, he can start to sprawl and I lose that leg.

[01:50:57] So we'll talk about dealing with [01:51:00] the cross face in a moment, but also just in terms of your grip here, two hands on the one is good. When I have my legs frame, okay, now he can't really [01:51:10] cross face. He can't get at my head. So my, my legs can do the work and my hands work together to lift the leg. That's what we really, that's the position we ideally get to, [01:51:20] but don't look to that straight away.

[01:51:21] Okay. So if I go two hands together here, I haven't dealt with the upper body properly. I'm going to get crossface. So a lot of the time, one hand will [01:51:30] reach to the leg. The other hand is going to be looking to block or frame. Okay. So he has closed the distance. Then I might be using that hand to frame, get my [01:51:40] head out, deal with the.

[01:51:41] The cross face or the lax. And if I feel like my legs aren't in a good position yet, I might be using my hand to frame, block my leg, frame, [01:51:50] pummel, get my legs in position. Okay. Now I connect to the leg second.[01:52:00]

[01:52:00] We talked about pummeling my foot in. I just want to talk about breaking their grip to pummel this. So this is going to come down. This is going to be the hard pummel. You've seen our retention [01:52:10] instruction on such an important action. I cannot break the grip. It might chop. If I chop my foot, so like a back heel, he's on the outside of Misha's forearm.

[01:52:19] I want [01:52:20] to have it aligned so that my foot, my heel, comes on the inside of his forearm. Keep holding. Same way. If he keeps that and I chop on the inside, it will break that [01:52:30] grip. Every time. Okay? So, we're looking, when we want to break this grip, we're looking to come up high with our leg, turn the foot inward.

[01:52:38] You can use your hand to assist with [01:52:40] this. So I really want, if he's really holding it and he's, I've gone like near my max, I can grab my own like shin, ankle, try to turn it inwards. [01:52:50] I should be able to chop down now. It will break the grip. I'm going to pummel inside. Okay. If there's a closed gap, maybe you've got like a frame, [01:53:00] maybe you've got like an under hook almost.

[01:53:02] If there's a closed gap like this, sometimes it's too close to. [01:53:10] To frame and grab my leg to high pummel, but you can use your your hip motion. Okay, I frame I Swing my hips up and I want to pummel my foot [01:53:20] Over and through this gap. It's just like throwing a lasso like you would in the game. Okay, so from here I'm not going to reach here if I pendulum my leg [01:53:30] I Can now my hips have come up in the air.

[01:53:32] It requires not much flexibility at all to take my foot over toes underneath And then look, he's got a grip. All I have to [01:53:40] do now is straighten my leg. It will peel his grip off. So keep your grip as tight as you want here, Mish. Okay, now it's my grip. Okay, I've got my, so he's got it deep. He's holding something.[01:53:50]

[01:53:50] Strip. It's my position now. I'm controlling that inside position. So in summary, if they're holding the shin, we can often do the high pummel. [01:54:00] We can use our hips to assist and our hand to assist and look underneath the armpit for that. If he's a bit closer. Like so, really using your hips, swinging up, pummeling your [01:54:10] foot through, extending, and then cooling back in, closing that gap off.[01:54:20] [01:54:30]

[01:54:34] Preventing and dealing with the cross face. So obviously we talked about this, that, you know, if I [01:54:40] connect to the leg, Mish gives a cross face, he can sprawl his leg back and he can actually clear that so I lose my position pretty much all together. Okay. So. So. [01:54:50] Ideally, my head doesn't. Like, stick it out here.

[01:54:55] I don't even see it. If I go for the leg and my head sticks out, it's very easy to grip that. [01:55:00] I almost want, that's why I want to, one of the reasons I want to invert underneath Mish, as opposed to to the side. Let's just turn a little. [01:55:10] So, instead of inverting like this, with my head exposed, I'd much rather pop my hips up on the spot.

[01:55:19] [01:55:20] Like this, okay? I get like a frame or a block of the arm. So my head's kind of staying in, in this range. If my head's here, like cross face me now Mish. There's not really a cross [01:55:30] face available. It's available when my head pokes out sideways. All right, so ideally when we do our invert, my legs and everything kind of comes, sorry, underneath that, [01:55:40] that spot.

[01:55:40] Now, in terms of my arms, I've got my, I've got my knees, sorry, my knees here. If I can push. Misha's torso out this way a little bit, it actually [01:55:50] becomes harder to crossface. So my knee shield might even kick over for a little bit to make that hard to get, especially as he's reaching for it. If I kick him across a little bit [01:56:00] with that leg, hard to get the crossface compared to if his shoulders go this way.

[01:56:03] If you go now, he gets my head. Get it? If I can get, so left hand [01:56:10] blocking the arm, right hand going underneath. Alright, side one, side one. So, a frame under the shoulder [01:56:20] blade with my hand and my elbow on the other side. Try the crossface here. You see, I can always duck my head under. You get it? Just here, he can start to cross face [01:56:30] and elbow too deep, he starts to slip over the top to cross face.

[01:56:33] But if my forearm kind of tracks Mish wherever he goes that's difficult to get to and it actually [01:56:40] keeps him open and elevated if I wanted to get my knee behind or if I ever wanted to step behind that armpit as well to continue to open that space and get my angle. [01:56:50] So if Mish does get the cross face, there's a couple of things I can try to do from here, right.

[01:56:55] If I've got my leg in position to some degree like this, or, or if I was [01:57:00] able to get a frame with my hand. So I'm going to grip on the scapula here and use my forearm to push up and away. Okay. So again, [01:57:10] even though I want this side angle on Mish, I don't want that with the cross face. I actually want him in line with me because when he's in line with me, the cross face is weak.

[01:57:18] Start ducking my head [01:57:20] underneath. So if I can here, I'll frame up and out. Opening my elbow and pushing out to the side. If I'm later again and he's got his head next to my head, I can [01:57:30] try to do the same action with my shoulder. Okay, so keep that tight and I can start to push out this way. Maybe duck my head underneath once I do that.[01:57:40]

[01:57:41] So as a general progression from worst to best case, we're here. I'm just, I'm a little square with my hips. Mish has a cross face. I'm going to [01:57:50] want to frame him up, move my hips out to the side. like this so I can start using a knee shield and start to pummel my hand underneath. Now that my [01:58:00] leg takes control I can let go of the frame underneath the armpit, start ducking my head under and I'm now starting to expose this part of [01:58:10] the body.

[01:58:10] I can even put my knee behind the shoulder hold on to the arm so when he tries to reach back for the crossface that's gone.[01:58:20]

[01:58:27] We're now going to go through some specific entries. [01:58:30] We're going to go through in a few different sections. We're going to go from Kneeling, against a kneeling opponent, against an opponent with combat base, and against an opponent who is standing. Because each of these requires a [01:58:40] slightly different, uh, attack sequence.[01:58:50]

[01:58:54] From the closed guard, we can enter the K guard. I'm going to show it as if your opponent is making [01:59:00] this somewhat difficult. So, one of the issues with closed guard is that, Mish actually has the space between my knees and my shoulders. Even though it's a very [01:59:10] like, there's very little risk for me having close guard in terms of Mish attacking me, I still can find it hard to get to K guard if he burrows down in the space between my [01:59:20] shoulders and my hips.

[01:59:20] Every time I try to enter the legs, he can be blocking that quite well. I don't have good upper body control right now, right? So one of the first things I look to [01:59:30] do is actually get my, I want to get my knees in front of the shoulders. I actually want to frame Misha's shoulders, open my guard and get to [01:59:40] here.

[01:59:40] Okay. So I'm calling it closed guard, but it's kind of, it's kind of the point where I could pull back to closed guard whenever I wanted, right? So I'm in that position, but I'm actually going to get my knees in front [01:59:50] like so. And usually I will grip on when I've got these two knees in front, I will grip onto the back of the shoulder as well.

[01:59:57] So right now my knees are mostly working as [02:00:00] frames. Now if Mish tries to control the space between my shoulders and my, and my knees and drive forward, you can see I can block that. Can you drive forward at me? Okay. If he starts trying to [02:00:10] retreat, I tend to use my hands over the top, run back and escape.

[02:00:14] So I can follow him this way, left and right. And as he's retreating, I will tend to kick [02:00:20] up more. So you can see with my, turn side on, you can see with my feet bent like this on my knees bent, I should say. It's more of a frame, whereas when he's trying to retreat, I can kick [02:00:30] more up with my shins working more to pull and prevent retreat.

[02:00:33] So run backwards. I've got good positioning in the, in the close, like an open close guard where I [02:00:40] can start to get my angle and he can't control this space now. So if I start inverting through leg, I have much better chance of getting it. So once I have my knees in position, I've got my feet on the [02:00:50] outside already.

[02:00:50] I'm going to look to hip out, get my hips to the side, okay? So that I don't. Just reach for the leg here. You will get cross face just about every time if you go here. If I [02:01:00] go here, he's gonna cross face, he's gonna sprawl, and I get no leg. Unless you like to set up arm locks, that would be okay, but otherwise, it's not so good.

[02:01:07] Okay, so, I want to [02:01:10] move my hips out first. Okay, like so. Now I can change a little bit. So I've got two shins. I move my hips out, and now change to just pulling with [02:01:20] the top one. And I'm dropping my left knee down towards the ground, opening up space more like a Kegel. Don't reach for the leg while your knee is through.

[02:01:29] Again, there's no [02:01:30] point doing that. I need my knee to be down on the ground. So a little hip escape here. My frame, hips out. And then pulling on one side, [02:01:40] dropping my knee down on the other. Okay. Once I have this and good control here, my aim is to get underneath this near shoulder. It's the battle for the crossface or who [02:01:50] wins the positioning here, right?

[02:01:51] Misha's going to try to crossface, he's going to try and push my head, he's going to try and do all sorts of things here. I'm looking to open this space, climb my [02:02:00] arm behind and reach my hand under the leg to enter into the It's the position, right? So have a little talk about that [02:02:10] battle there. So my knee is keeping mish away.

[02:02:16] I'll often then, if I'm holding this armpit, I start to bring my [02:02:20] head forward here. Okay. I can start to reach underneath if I need to, right? This will force his hand to actually come in and attach. If his hand's back here, he's kind of [02:02:30] waiting for me. If I go for K guy, then he cross faces. I've moved first.

[02:02:34] Okay, I've left my leg with my head open. If I bring my head in first, [02:02:40] like this, so I've curled my head in front of the chest, he now feels the crossface is not available. Okay, so I start reaching, and now Mish's hand is either going [02:02:50] to come in or it's not. Okay, if it comes in, I'm going to immediately start trying to deal with that.

[02:02:55] Okay, if he's got it back, I ignore it. Okay, if it's back, I can [02:03:00] ignore and start to attach to the leg because I'm getting my frame. Okay. So, it's kind of a who moves first, here, or like who opens first. If he's reaching his hand [02:03:10] already, when I'm here, I'm going to be trying to duck under that arm, reach behind the shoulder.

[02:03:15] If his arm's back, I bring my head in, like so, hips [02:03:20] out, so my head goes in the middle, and I'm reaching underneath the leg, framing underneath the armpit. If he manages to get my, my head, or a little bit closer here, I could frame, push [02:03:30] up, get underneath, duck my head under. I expose the leg entering into the Kegel.

[02:03:39] [02:03:40] If[02:03:50] [02:04:00] [02:04:10] [02:04:20] [02:04:30] [02:04:40] [02:04:50]

[02:04:57] you come against someone from close guard who is [02:05:00] very good at getting his hand in front, especially if they're like pushing, doing these sort of things, um, and then they only cross face if you get a bit closer. Sometimes it is hard, despite your [02:05:10] best attempts, it can be hard to get towards the Kegel. the leg.

[02:05:13] You got two options here. You either play a more open style of, of K guard and I start kind of [02:05:20] backing out a bit. There's some things we can do to start to invert through and still attack or we try to attack this arm. I recommend the safer thing is to get good at [02:05:30] attacking the arm. So if I'm trying to attack from this kind of open position here, Mish is always looking to get his arms in and push my head and attack here.

[02:05:38] I'm going to look to push the hand to [02:05:40] the outside I take my head back, so there's not much to hold on to, and I clear it past my shoulder, cupping on with my elbow underneath, [02:05:50] reaching to the shoulder. Not the elbow, he's going to free that easily, I want to get the shoulder, okay? So see how it's going like, my elbow tight, hooking behind the shoulder, because when he retracts his [02:06:00] elbow, it runs into my hand, okay?

[02:06:02] If here he brings his elbow inside my hand, I lose it, okay? So, he's blocking my head, okay, slip my head away. Hand [02:06:10] out to the side, grip onto the shoulder, and then I want to bring my shoulder in front of that gap. So now when he tries to pull his hand through that gap, it's stuck. So again, [02:06:20] we're here, I caught this, I can either connect my hands together here, and start to work prone arm bar attacks.

[02:06:29] [02:06:30] Or, if he starts driving forward, I can connect the head and the arm, and we can start working attacks from here, trying to isolate the arm. Alright. This is probably [02:06:40] almost another instructional series on arm attacks with head and arms. So to go into a lot of detail about this. I might just show a basic prone armbar to kind of add to that.

[02:06:49] But, [02:06:50] so if I can clear the arm, capture the shoulder, connect my hands together, very high on the shoulder here. So it's hard for Mish to retreat. I actually want to connect now, [02:07:00] I've got my shoulder forward, I want to connect Mish's shoulder to my chest so there's no gap. He might pummel his hand, pummel back through.

[02:07:08] Yeah, and he's out. Okay. But if I [02:07:10] close that gap here, that's very difficult. I don't want him to turn his elbow upwards as well. His hand, uh, yeah, hand upwards and suck his elbow this way. [02:07:20] So I make sure I keep my elbow low and my grip somewhat around the corner here. Okay. So not too much like this. The more I open this elbow, the more I slip [02:07:30] this way more likely.

[02:07:31] So I keep my elbow locked down and I keep his chest here and my head can reinforce it as well. From there, I tend to step [02:07:40] just below the hip, not on the hip, because I want to kick his leg out like so, and I start sliding onto the prone armbar. So again, [02:07:50] finish frames, then I move the arm out of the way, capture the shoulder, bring our shoulder forward, connect our hands close to the shoulder here, and pull in.

[02:07:58] If you start at the elbow, [02:08:00] basically, okay, so start pretty much at the shoulder. I'm framing his head pretty much with my arm and pulling in tight. Once I'm here, my head stays tight, my hands are wrapping slightly further [02:08:10] around the back of the shoulder, then my elbow opening up. From there, I work, just try to step on the hip, and then dropping down a little bit to capture the thigh.

[02:08:19] Okay, so [02:08:20] stay up, sorry, get back up. Don't kick the hip, it won't stretch him out. On the thigh though, we'll start to stretch him out. From here, my elbow stays dropped, I slide towards the elbow at [02:08:30] this late stage, and I can start to squeeze or sweep to get on top. [02:08:40] [02:08:50] [02:09:00] [02:09:10] [02:09:20] [02:09:30] [02:09:40] [02:09:50] [02:10:00] [02:10:10] [02:10:20] [02:10:30] [02:10:40] [02:10:50] [02:11:00] [02:11:10] [02:11:20] Yeah.

[02:11:25] [02:11:30] [02:11:40] All right, so now we're going to deal from an open guard against a [02:11:50] kneeling opponent. So how do we get into K guard from here? All right. So ideally you get the ability to control your opponent's arm [02:12:00] in a two on one. Why is this good? It opens the space between Mish's knee and his shoulder here, so I can actually get my foot to his hip.

[02:12:08] If he's got his arm here ready to block [02:12:10] that, it can be hard to get my foot. in towards the hip and you can push my leg to the ground and it's going to be obviously not close to the K guard here. So if I can, [02:12:20] I want to control a two on one, preferably not just the wrist because the wrist doesn't necessarily pull the elbow from the, from the body, but preferably I can [02:12:30] actually get to the point where I've either, where I've separated his elbow from his hip.

[02:12:35] Okay. So a, my elbow towards my hip gripping [02:12:40] onto mishas. wrist here and my other hand gripping his elbow, but also closing that towards my hip. Okay. So generally whoever's [02:12:50] elbows are close to their hip is winning the control of this battle. If I reached out like this, Mish actually probably has more control than me right now.

[02:12:56] My elbows are open. He's got space. I don't really [02:13:00] want to do this from here. I'm going to keep my elbows tight and just look for his wrist. But if I get the chance, when I got my elbows tight and I start pulling back, I can take his elbow. [02:13:10] the back of his elbow here and stop him now, I've got a block now for him pulling his elbow to his hip.

[02:13:14] This is great for the two on one. So once that space is open, I want to put my foot [02:13:20] past the hip, but not just like this. I'm going to do a big hip escape. Guys, this isn't guard retention. We don't hip escape when we're doing open guard retention, but when we're in offense, it's [02:13:30] fine. foot on the mat, move my kicks out quite far, close.

[02:13:35] So Misha's leg here, his far leg, but also to the side, okay? So not just, [02:13:40] not backwards, okay? I'm not trying to make space, I'm actually trying to close the gap with this. So we're here, step on the mat, and I pull myself on my side, around the corner, and my foot [02:13:50] just past the hip with this space open. So I've dealt with this arm blocking my leg, and I've also got a chance to use this arm to stop him from cross facing [02:14:00] me and being annoying with that arm.

[02:14:01] So I've dealt with that. two things by using this two on one. This is the ideal scenario.

[02:14:08] Once more, I'm going to look [02:14:10] usually for the wrist first. My elbows are tight to my body. I can then take my hand and capture the back of the elbow. I step out to the side and I use that foot [02:14:20] to hip escape close to Mish and drag my foot just past his hip. Once I have this position, I now will look to pummel [02:14:30] my foot under the shoulder.

[02:14:35] So, we've already covered how we do this, if his elbow is tight or if he's gripping my [02:14:40] leg, I can chop inside, I'm going to go from here. If Mish kicks, it's just to keep your elbow tight by your side. If his elbow is tight, I put my toes through the gap first, kick, [02:14:50] and I'll then be able to hook. Once I have this, and I've got the 2 on 1, I'll kick.

[02:14:55] blocking that arm. So it could be at the wrist, ideally at the armpit, but I [02:15:00] feel like he's a bit low right now for me to do that. So I'm going to stay on the wrist, still can't cross face me. I'm going to start to invert and get to the leg. Now, how do I invert here? [02:15:10] I'm going to go on my shoulder, lift my hips up towards me and then bring my shoulder closer.

[02:15:16] Okay. So I'm going to go on my shoulder [02:15:20] like this and lift my hips up and close. See on my shoulder. When I do that. So from here, I [02:15:30] go on my shoulder, my hips move in, and see how my shoulder moves forward as I do that. Hips go in, shoulder skips in as well, okay. So I'm kind of, [02:15:40] uh, closing this gap with my hips and keeping in control, keeping this space to help, like so, okay.[02:15:50]

[02:15:50] And then from here, I've got good access to the leg to reach underneath. So that's kind of the ideal way. Sometimes you will find, like if your hips are up, sometimes you'll find you [02:16:00] can just reach, right? If you can do that, that's fine. Just reach under the leg. If it's a little more difficult, you're going to invert and spin underneath like so, and we can capture the knee line.[02:16:10]

[02:16:10] From there, I'll be looking to get my knee on the inside of the armpit. If he's low like this, if he's more high, I'll be blocking, maybe even stepping on that [02:16:20] armpit, or keeping my knee as a frame. Just yeah, even just like this so you can't close this gap and I can connect my hands ready for the second phase Now [02:16:30] when we do this half invert Often it can be easier if your elbow comes behind your your back Okay, so as my hips lift I get a chance to do that when my [02:16:40] hips are down my elbow can't drop behind But if I lift my hips up, so yeah, my elbows drop behind.

[02:16:46] Okay, this makes it easier It's kind of like I've got base [02:16:50] behind me now, so if he tries to flatten me out, my elbow is working as base to stop myself getting pushed back. With my elbow forward, I can get tilted back a lot easier and the invert is almost [02:17:00] unwinded. Okay, so, a lot of the time, if we're far away, like this, I get up on my shoulder, see I'm actually like, making distance first, I'm pushing away, elbow drops, [02:17:10] and then I can close in and reach my arm last.

[02:17:14] If you do have this wrist, the direction you want to pull is not towards you, but actually like [02:17:20] above and across. It's like I'm stretching out here. You can see that does two things. It brings Mish's weight, hips forward. So it brings his hips closer to me, lifting his, uh, [02:17:30] butt off his heels. And it also gets me a bit of an angle as well.

[02:17:34] Okay. Obviously if I push that way, there's no tension. It's gotta be like up and across like this with [02:17:40] the arm. If I'm holding the wrist. So in summary from open guard, you can get the two on one, get the elbow if possible. You can just do this with the wrist, but the elbow is better. If you see this [02:17:50] gap, this is excellent.

[02:17:51] Okay. From here, I'm going to hit the skate. Foot goes past the hip. I start to pummel my foot underneath the armpit here. [02:18:00] From there, I stay holding the arm. If I can, I'm going to either just reach underneath or if I'm, it is a little further [02:18:10] away, I often will move myself. away, get my hips up, curl in, and capture the leg that way.[02:18:20] [02:18:30] [02:18:40] [02:18:50] [02:19:00]

[02:19:04] So you often come against someone who's keeping their arms back, so Misha's elbows are really tight, [02:19:10] and I can't get two on one control, or maybe just every time I'm trying to control, he's fighting that battle too well. Often I will just try to shoot, like if his elbows are so tight, I can get [02:19:20] pretty good, I can get my leg to like here, as opposed to So his arms are forward, and I try to shoot, he'll probably push my leg off.

[02:19:27] But if his arms are back, and I'm trying to hand fight, [02:19:30] often I can still get my leg in decent position. Even if his elbow is tight, it's often enough for him to start reaching and blocking the leg, blocking his arm from pushing my leg off. [02:19:40] And then I can be continuing the same battle from here. Even if you don't get the arm, like if we don't have control of the arm, we still can start looking to get our [02:19:50] positioning.

[02:19:50] Thanks sir. So, starting to reach underneath this far shoulder to block the crossface, head to the shoulder, and inverting underneath to attach to the leg for [02:20:00] kick.[02:20:10] [02:20:20] [02:20:30] [02:20:40] [02:20:50]

[02:20:52] One reaction you're going to come against is an opponent who kind of sits back on their heels and leans back, and it's hard to get [02:21:00] under the leg when they do this, because I Part of what we did before was kind of pull Mish forward or a frame and my legs kind of like pulled him forward and opened [02:21:10] space to reach my arm under.

[02:21:11] But if he's sitting so far back that can be difficult to do. I'll show you how we go about getting to the K guard anyway here, [02:21:20] right. So I want to actually force a reaction out of Mish by pushing myself into him, right. So I will get up. [02:21:30] shoulder and actually bring my hips in close. Okay. But I want to use my legs to, to pull.

[02:21:35] It can actually be both legs. My, this left leg chopping can kind of [02:21:40] pull back towards me a bit as a back heel. Hard to do where I am now, but when I, when I actually get up, you'll see that this is going to be a bit stronger. And also my top leg [02:21:50] pulling my knee towards my chest and hooking the, the shoulder.

[02:21:53] Okay. And we want a push pull thing because I can't just stay back. I can't pull him [02:22:00] forward just with my legs here. But if I block the arm, start to lift my hips up and cool in like this. Okay. So you see here, I've got my knee down to the [02:22:10] ground and look how close I've brought my hips. Okay. So I'm very, almost like I'm trying to attach myself with my hips to Mish.

[02:22:16] My foot is still pretty much hooked under the shoulder here [02:22:20] or back of the shoulder blade. Okay. And then from here, when you fall, it's not, I'm not falling back sideways. It's almost like I'm doing a shoulder roll or a front roll here. [02:22:30] Okay. And that will bring him forward or very likely to. Okay. And then you use anything else you can, right?

[02:22:36] I might be able to grip onto his arm or his armpit. Often his hand can be a [02:22:40] good, like extra lever to work from here as well. So, so here I'm trying to, to bring Mish [02:22:50] forward. I might get a grip already. I'm going to move away first, up on my shoulder, and curl in, facing my hips to the [02:23:00] ground, as I come closer.

[02:23:01] Okay, so notice that I'm not facing up anymore, I can't do this here, I end up just squaring up. I want to, I want more face towards the ground. [02:23:10] And I curl, see me, I even like hook his leg to assist my, myself to pull in. So my knee is touched on the ground, I'm like this. I [02:23:20] can use both legs as I roll through.

[02:23:24] Like so. Okay. So try and keep your base there. [02:23:30] I can push him back like that. See, I've fallen back. And if he starts to resist that at all, I can roll back under and take him [02:23:40] forward. Now, if they keep leaning back as you push, You at a certain point his knee will actually lift up anyway Okay So if he doesn't drive in against me as [02:23:50] I as I continue to push at a certain point see that knee starting to come Up, I mean, I'm probably gonna come up on top, but he'll probably lift this knee or open that space Anyway, as I start to [02:24:00] tilt him backwards, okay, so by continuing that that drive in Like this, okay, often you will get an action where you can [02:24:10] start to work underneath the leg And if they drive back, you've got that shoulder roll to pull them forward.[02:24:20] [02:24:30] [02:24:40] [02:24:50] [02:25:00] [02:25:10]

[02:25:11] As well as going for K guard from here, just giving you some of the other options in terms of against a kneeling opponent. Often, if you get someone who is very seated [02:25:20] back and very, you know, just blocking and not doing anything. It's often better to actually just try to get an angle on it. I want to start to get around the side, which will force the leg to come up and [02:25:30] often force the heel.

[02:25:30] So I'm here against Ed, I can be pummeling my feet being in good, a good position for retention. So keeping something in front of his shoulder and put one leg next [02:25:40] to his leg and I start to move myself around the corner like this. I'm starting to get around towards the back, right? So I can even hook the stomach [02:25:50] here.

[02:25:50] My foot hooking under the, this gap between the leg and the butt and hooking the, the body here. Usually, I mean if nothing happened, if Ed just stayed where he [02:26:00] was, then I would continue now to start to move around towards the back. Usually, what's going to happen as I do that, is Ed starts to [02:26:10] lift the knee up, and that becomes a delt heel hook, and that allows me to get a control.

[02:26:14] to attack from De La Riva, okay? So, you feel like you can't get your K guard going, [02:26:20] continually blocking that K guard entry. Sometimes, working around the corner here, forces them to stand up, open up, and give you De La Riva.[02:26:30] [02:26:40] [02:26:50] [02:27:00] [02:27:10] [02:27:20] [02:27:30]

[02:27:31] One thing we can do, as our opponent backs away, is to change sides, okay? So, you'll notice I've got my right leg high under the armpit, left leg low, [02:27:40] as I'm trying to attach to the leg. If Mish is backing away, I use this under the armpit to slow him down. I start kicking upwards with my foot, [02:27:50] back away, drop that shoulder down.

[02:27:51] It drags me to the side. So I can actually like, if I push up with this leg and down with my left leg, it helps me do a little [02:28:00] scissor to the side and I keep on my armpit. So if he's still backing away here, that's difficult now. And then I change. Okay. Now this one slips up to the armpit. [02:28:10] This one goes down to the hip, and knee goes to the inside.

[02:28:13] We can just do this as a drill, so if Mish is backing away again, I'm pushing up, changing, [02:28:20] and then I change back. I snap these in place so I've got good tension pushing down the hip, up on the armpit, exposing this side. If Mish were to walk back again, [02:28:30] up, change, and attach to the K down the side this time.[02:28:40] [02:28:50] [02:29:00] [02:29:10] [02:29:20] [02:29:30] [02:29:40]

[02:29:48] So occasionally you'll come against [02:29:50] someone who sprawls their leg, like just focuses a lot on sprawling this leg back. Okay. So he knows that I've got this leg down and he doesn't want me to get to it and I'm trying to attach to that. [02:30:00] And you can see how hard work that's going to be for me to attach to that leg.

[02:30:04] Okay. So. So if, I guess the thing with that is obviously I'm not going to attach it this way, it is possible [02:30:10] if I invert halfway that I can still reach the leg. So sometimes if I get a good enough inverse and I'm here, I can still reach a sprawled [02:30:20] leg by being halfway through, but I'm actually going to show you changing to the other side here.

[02:30:25] Cause I think this is a really important action to do and it does occur like this [02:30:30] occasionally. Um, and it also is. Just very useful for learning how to use this top leg and the importance of this top leg. Okay, so if Mish sprawls [02:30:40] here And I realize that's gone. He's usually given me space to take my left leg and Put it on the ground on this near side.

[02:30:47] Okay, I keep a high knee [02:30:50] shield again. Don't get squashed down here Now he's so far back. I'm not I'm not worried about the threat of the pass right now So I'm happy to take my leg across and I've still got the knee shield in case he does [02:31:00] start to come forward again I can use that knee shield to give me space to put my foot back across.

[02:31:06] So Mish is sprawled back, I take my leg to here, if he starts coming [02:31:10] forward to try to pass this way again, I can always take my leg through and continue back to Kegel. Now what I'm going to do from there, I take my foot and I plant it on the ground, and I want to, see how [02:31:20] far my hips are out here so Mish is really, my hips are out and he's in front of me here.

[02:31:24] I'm going to keep this foot stepped on the back, which gives me good tension. And I'm going to roll [02:31:30] through and attach the K guard on this knee leg. Okay, so I push off the ground, I invert under myself, so I'm going to block, push, [02:31:40] and I, I keep the ankle or the shin here hooked against Misha's armpit. Now ideally, I actually have my whole knee [02:31:50] cutting across, see I've like really controlled the inside space here.

[02:31:53] The more I open this and I give a gap here, like potentially I could lose position. But [02:32:00] that is difficult for him to take that. If I'm focusing on keeping my knee up, in fact, it's nearly impossible for me to actually come underneath for any sort of pass. And look what's happening. As I [02:32:10] roll through like this, I can step on the armpit with my second leg, climb down to the leg and attach to the opposite leg.[02:32:20]

[02:32:22] So I don't want too deep of an issue. I'm really just hooked with my my ankle here. I go for the far legs, pull that back. [02:32:30] Okay, I step on the ground and as I roll through I maintain a good angle here. So I kind of, you kind of stop here and [02:32:40] lift your hips up okay like that. Don't keep rolling through all the way yet.

[02:32:44] I keep my knee, my knee lifts up to take that space and then I can reinforce it with my [02:32:50] second leg and attach to the far leg for the Okay, so, I think we have people go wrong here. As we roll under, if I [02:33:00] keep doing like a full, a full invert, I kind of spin out before I can capture the leg, okay? I want to stop halfway and bring my knee up [02:33:10] and start collecting this position there, okay?

[02:33:12] So it's this halfway point where I've actually got good ability to reach for the leg. It's hard if I try and move your leg away from you here. I've got his armpit, I'm [02:33:20] back kneeling against it, and I can reach for the leg. It's hard for him to fully retract his leg here. I can climb through and attach the keg up.

[02:33:28] So we frame the forearm, [02:33:30] I retract my bottom leg, I lift my hips up, and frame the shoulder here to rock through. I lift my knee up. I [02:33:40] drag forward. So at this point, it's not a back heel. Okay. I'm not back feeling like this. I'm keeping my leg flare and opening with my shin and my knee close to the chest.

[02:33:49] [02:33:50] Potentially stepping on the armpit, collecting through into Kegel. Now, as I roll through, I want to continue to prevent the retreat. So I often like to [02:34:00] reach under this far armpit too. It's hard to get, like if I go here, this is not a grip, right? But, As I start to invert, I'm blocking. I go here. Okay. Now this is the grip.[02:34:10]

[02:34:10] Two grips here are stopping the retreat. Okay. Pull back. Okay. I can follow him, especially when my knee comes up. So from here, I can actually [02:34:20] choose either side. All right. I've got the armpit and my shin cut across his shoulders. If I want, I can lift up and go back to the original side by threading my leg back through.[02:34:30]

[02:34:30] Okay. Thread that back through. And I've got his armpit. I've exposed the leg. Or, I could continue to spin out, step the armpit here, [02:34:40] and expose the cape. [02:34:50] Occasionally[02:35:00] [02:35:10] [02:35:20] [02:35:30] [02:35:40] [02:35:50] [02:36:00] [02:36:10] [02:36:20] [02:36:30] [02:36:40] [02:36:50] [02:37:00]

[02:37:01] you'll get someone looking for something like a weave pass. and they're sprawling back and this is difficult to get to. I might, in a scenario like this, I might not [02:37:10] reach towards the shoulder, like where that's so far away, and I'll often just stay on the near shoulder as a way to keep Mish from, from pummeling back, okay?

[02:37:18] So I can still retract my leg, [02:37:20] lift my hips up, and roll through, right? Often from here, I try to pummel my knee inside the arm, like so, okay? And that starts to [02:37:30] open up that space towards the Kegel. So again, if I can't, if the far off side is too far, I often go towards this shoulder, keeping my knee high, if I can, posting on [02:37:40] the mat, rolling through, and then, I'm trying to get inside this arm, okay, so, Mish might be doing whatever with that arm, I want to get my knee inside, [02:37:50] and that's kind of like a, it's a little wedge, or a block here.

[02:37:53] If Mish tries to run away from this, I've got a good back heel, I'm pinching my legs together, pretty hard for him to hide [02:38:00] himself, if I extend my left leg. It actually exposes his, his leg to me, okay? So back heel and knee inside. Expose your hip. [02:38:10] And take the kick out of position.[02:38:20]

[02:38:22] We're just gonna cover if, if someone's kneeling and they block, you know, somewhere around your knee. We will talk about how, [02:38:30] like, people will two on one your legs and so on. We'll talk about that from the, um, from the standing position quite a bit. So it's kind of the same what you would do kneeling and standing but we'll go through just the [02:38:40] arm bar we could do now.

[02:38:41] So I start to enter towards K guard and sometimes Mish will block this and it stops me really getting the full position I want okay. So [02:38:50] one thing we can do is attack an arm bar from here. I want to, you could just pull from here but it's unlikely to work because Mish can start to pull back. So I pull against his elbow he pulls [02:39:00] which is fine but that can be enough sometimes that I do this.

[02:39:02] And then I start to pummel my foot inside, and I get my positioning I want. So you can threaten that, absolutely. If you really want the armbar, get your hips in [02:39:10] position first. So it's kind of a quick, it is a quick armbar. So, I'm going to swing my hips up, and see how his elbows come below the line of my hips now.

[02:39:19] Or above, I should say, [02:39:20] above. Okay, above the line of my hips, so when I swing my leg over, I have an armbar. Okay, whereas, from here, his elbow is still free from my hips. So, all you have to [02:39:30] do, from here you might be framing. swing your leg a big pendulum and get your hips up high okay i want to stretch his arm out as much as i [02:39:40] can as well so i bring this leg leg nice and wide reach over the top at the back of the tricep and back of the elbow here and i want my forearm my [02:39:50] uh sorry my arm here near my armpit to capture mish's arm so when i kick my leg now you can't really follow keep that grip [02:40:00] It's going to strip the grip.

[02:40:01] I've got the arm. You can't pull away because I've got the elbow. So you should be able to swing your hips up straight into an armbar here and [02:40:10] finish. You will have to do this reasonably quick because some little adjustments in rotation can make it very hard to finish. For example, there or even the other way sometimes that it becomes more like an old platter.[02:40:20]

[02:40:20] So you kind of want to align everything first, pick up the elbow, kick, swing your hips in, Curl, and [02:40:30] finish the outlook.[02:40:40] [02:40:50] [02:41:00] [02:41:10] [02:41:20]

[02:41:28] Linking the techniques [02:41:30] against a kneeling opponent. So, from the close guard, we want to get to K guard. We're going to frame the shoulders, get our knees in front of the shoulders, and [02:41:40] prevent, get the back of the armpits now, so you can't back away. From here, I'm going to look to get my hips out to the side, start to reach underneath the leg, [02:41:50] and maintain frames as I start to work underneath with my knee.

[02:41:54] and attach to the Keg out position. Any sort of crossface or if Ed gets down too [02:42:00] low, I need to be working to frame up first and get distance management or the space between my shoulders and my knees covered first. Then I can [02:42:10] start to block the crossface and start to clear it using my arm or my legs trying to get underneath this armpit and my head ducked underneath.

[02:42:17] Then I can start to attach [02:42:20] onto the leg.

[02:42:23] From an open guard position, a two on one is a great control you can take where you can separate the elbow from the knee. We [02:42:30] move our hips out to the side and get our foot just past the hip with our knee down. From there, we're usually looking to pummel to win this space here and control our opponent's upper [02:42:40] body.

[02:42:40] Try to get past the line of their arm and we can start to lift our hips and get in towards the leg. And so, two ways we were going about that, we could either [02:42:50] reach into the leg if it's available or let's say it's more blocking here I'll often be coming up and then curling in underneath [02:43:00] to get to the leg as going forward would be in the way of the crossface.

[02:43:04] If Edward to be sprawling this leg back and it's very difficult to get to that leg we can retract our leg here [02:43:10] keep our top hook our top knee shield hooking over the back lifting our hips and rolling through to either the opposite side. Here you go. [02:43:20] Or even to the same side leg, but now we have control of the upper body.

[02:43:23] So all from there, I've missed this bar leg. I roll under sometimes from [02:43:30] here, can block this armpit and climb back to attach to that same leg. All[02:43:40]

[02:43:41] right, we're looking at some entries into kneeling opponents. So this first one is [02:43:50] from Essentially the That closed guard or open closed guard. So first off you can see what I'm trying to do is keep at least one [02:44:00] leg or probably both really. I want the shins in front, but also it's kind of a tricky one where I'm trying to stop Lee here from being out of pressure into me.

[02:44:09] [02:44:10] So I've got like a knee shield almost, but also keeping my feet up in the air so he can't back away. So it's got some pressure under his armpits as well to stop retreat because you need to be able to stop [02:44:20] both. Okay, um, so often that'll be framing the shoulders to get to that position. Right, once I've got that I've got a chance to reach underneath the leg and [02:44:30] the obvious thing I've got to deal with here is the potential for a cross face.

[02:44:34] All right, which we'll, we'll talk about in a moment. So just so happened I actually reached under the far leg. [02:44:40] Lee's sprawled so well. So this is a very common reaction. You go for it, they sprawl, and you can reach the far leg. And once I got the far leg, I kind of pushed my hips in. I [02:44:50] didn't talk about this too much, but.

[02:44:53] Um, that's at least to let me adjust. Okay, so notice my top leg now staying underneath the armpit and trying to keep [02:45:00] distance as well. So the top leg working. By gripping this arm here behind the tricep, this is going to do two things. It's going to stop Lee from scooting backwards [02:45:10] and it's also going to stop him from, it's going to be harder to reach for a cross face because if I can curl in a bit, it'd be hard to take the arm backwards and then to grab my head.

[02:45:18] I believe I'm going to [02:45:20] replace my arm with my leg to the, to the armpit. So I've got more power to stop him closing in and that should start to give me room to start reaching for this [02:45:30] leg. Let's see. Yes. Okay. So you can see my, I back heel against his tricep as I reached to that leg. So stopping him retreating here and also bringing his weight [02:45:40] forward to reach to that leg.

[02:45:41] So watch that again. Watch that leg back heel. There we go. And then I've caught on to the leg. [02:45:50] Um, So that was my entry into K guard. Obviously, I do have this right leg free now. It's not ideal. Um, I probably would look to try to either pummel that back or pummel it back [02:46:00] through this gap later. You'll see what to do from there later.

[02:46:02] Okay. Um, but ideally that's still underneath the armpit. Here's another example. Lee's really good at stopping [02:46:10] you getting it like he's really hard to get in onto the legs on because he likes this low sprawly sort of posture. So he's a good To demonstrate this here again. [02:46:20] Look at that gripping the shoulder hips away and getting the back heel against the Against the armpit and really I'm dealing with a cross face here too.

[02:46:29] So, [02:46:30] um, in recognizing that that's allowed me to, um, catch on to the leg. He kind of pulled away from the, the arm because there's a potential for an arm lock as well. Okay. So you can [02:46:40] see I've got that back heel to the, but when my hips went out gripping the arm and then I can reach under the leg and that's giving me room to reach under the leg.

[02:46:49] Let's look at, let's [02:46:50] look back again. So starting that. Starting that, he's driving forward into me, so my shins are blocking, keeping this space open, [02:47:00] giving my hips some freedom to move, my, I'm framing away on the head to keep more distance, and then my hips can swing out as I [02:47:10] reach over. Okay, there we go, hips swing out, and I'm now into the, the K guard entry as he starts to pop up.

[02:47:19] Next one we will [02:47:20] look at some, uh, Attacks on the arm, so going for that prone arm bar position. So often when we, uh, I'm kind of [02:47:30] looking for it here, but often when you attack the K guard, so you threaten the leg, your opponent's arm comes in. In this case, I've just managed to reach in. I've caught the head and the arm.[02:47:40]

[02:47:40] So I often like to get the head and the arm and then move on to just the arm. Sometimes I'll, sometimes you'll go a little bit different. Okay, so I've slid that down to the, [02:47:50] to the elbow as my opponent postured. Now this is, ideally I kick the legs out like I talked about. Now, this is like it's own system really, so I'll [02:48:00] talk about it a little bit.

[02:48:00] We won't go into it too much detail. But, if they start posturing up, I want to make sure my knee is locked behind the, Can you see I'm jamming his armpit here? So it's hard [02:48:10] to retreat, okay? Um, so I might step on the hip, but it's really important your knee, if they're postured and they're trying to pull away, that your knee goes behind the armpit.

[02:48:17] And then you can get some good torque. You can see here I can [02:48:20] actually put some pressure. Yeah, there's this gap here I can pull my arms into. And then I think my opponent drives forward and I switch this into being [02:48:30] a arm bar on the free arm. So as he drives in, you can see this arm Here is now in front of my hips as a way to defend and I'm going to swing my right leg over the head [02:48:40] and take that arm.

[02:48:40] So I've now trapped that arm, right leg over the head and straight armbar. Here [02:48:50] again, I'm going for K guard, Ed here is looking to cross face to block me. Okay, so his right arm is going to cross face, I'm [02:49:00] framing his head, So often when you go for this arm, they put this knee up, and you have to use like this little knee shield to push that leg back.

[02:49:08] And now I'm attached to the [02:49:10] arm. I've got just the arm this time, not the head and the arm. You can't switch between the two. I've got a nice tight grip, and I believe I'll try and kick his leg out. [02:49:20] There we go, okay. Tried to kick his leg out anyway.[02:49:30]

[02:49:30] Or at least got his base, uh, base broken down and trapped down. Ideally, I kicked him all the way up, but he actually managed to keep his base pretty well and I got the tap. [02:49:40] Alright, so now we're looking for a bit more open guard entries into, into K guard. So we're in an open guard and [02:49:50] our opponent is kneeling still.

[02:49:52] Okay, so I'll just go back to that, that first one. Sorry, I'll just [02:50:00] Give that a moment. Okay, so you can see I'm controlling the arms. This is similar to that closed guard position, actually. It's just, [02:50:10] um, happened to be a little more open. So I've kicked under the armpits, kicking up, trying to keep some forward pressure.

[02:50:16] I've reached over the shoulder to stop that retreat. [02:50:20] And that's allowed me to scoot underneath and trap that far leg. Knee on the inside, foot on the outside. And then I want to [02:50:30] get, obviously I want to pummel my foot under the armpit, but if they're holding the leg, you can often use that to just pull their knee up on your stomach.

[02:50:36] So there we are. Knees come up. Now I've pummeled this [02:50:40] foot into better position. And we're now in a seated leg entanglement. And this one I think my opponent tries to [02:50:50] go underneath the legs. Okay, this is a reasonably common reaction. If you can reach under, if you can get your knee down as they go to go under, so.

[02:50:59] You look [02:51:00] here, sorry.

[02:51:04] You see, I'll get my knee on the inside, I reach under and my knee goes, okay, if I [02:51:10] can, here could be bad or could be good. If my knee gets lifted up too high, that's really bad. If my knee can drop down towards the ground, I've got a great chance of entering. Okay, and you can see I've dropped my knee down, my [02:51:20] hips swung away, knees down, foot's on the outside, hands are connected now.

[02:51:24] I'm in that K guard entry. Really hard for them to stop you entering once you get to that [02:51:30] position. Here again against Lee, but this time from more of a kind of from an open guard pulling him back into into closed guard. So [02:51:40] you can see I'm reaching to the back of the shoulders trying to stop him retreating, but still keeping those shins in front just like before.

[02:51:48] Rolling to my back. [02:51:50] Now I can actually kick the feet up towards the roof to kick him forward. So kicking up and. up and kind of if I can put point the cursor like in the direction I'm trying [02:52:00] to drive his armpits kind of this way and it would be towards the camera as well a little bit all right and keeping that up [02:52:10] reaching for the leg

[02:52:16] Oh, and this is changing sides. Okay, actually this is a very important [02:52:20] skill set to have. So you really want to attack K guard on both sides. So you'll see there, as I attack one side, Lee's moved away. He's made it really hard for me to reach that leg. [02:52:30] So look again, I try and reach with my left hand. I want to get that left hand under, he moves back.

[02:52:35] So I kick under this armpit, and I pull that armpit forward, which is going to let me [02:52:40] swing to my other hip. So I'm going to kind of sit forward, As much as I can anyway. So sitting up a bit, so trying to get my hips up, sorry, my [02:52:50] head up. Kicking backwards, keeping pressure on that shoulder as I swing to the other side and then that leg will be available and I can actually connect to it.

[02:52:59] So I've reached that [02:53:00] leg now. I've got my left leg underneath the armpit as I did that.

[02:53:08] And now I'm in the Kegel.[02:53:10]

[02:53:17] Another example, so [02:53:20] Lee's obviously a good one to work against, going one way and then the other, and then actually attaching to the knee leg in this one. We didn't talk about that too much, but that's something you can do. Alright, now we'll [02:53:30] look at spinning through to get to K guard. So here, you'll notice my right leg is free.

[02:53:37] It's going to go to the mat where my top leg is [02:53:40] pummeled in the armpit, and that top leg will actually keep. attached to the armpit until I spin through and that actually is giving me access on [02:53:50] on this side so what is normally the far side you'll see some better examples of this here okay so look at this top leg in the armpit this is usually good if sounds low and [02:54:00] they sprawl every time you reach they just keep sprawling back See, so I'm going to take my right leg out in a moment.

[02:54:07] There we go. I'm going to push off the mat, lift my hips in the [02:54:10] air, and try to maintain as much pressure on this armpit as possible. So you have to have a good frame or pull on the other side. Preferably actually reaching under the far armpit with your hand to, [02:54:20] to stop them from, um, retreating. All right.

[02:54:23] And you can see as I spin through, now this leg's going to become available on this side. [02:54:30] Okay. So I didn't keep perfect contact with the armpit, but it was enough, you know, he sprawled so far on the far leg that I was able to attach to, to this leg. [02:54:40] And here you'll see not exactly the same, but you'll see an example of me spinning through actually voluntarily.

[02:54:45] Sometimes you're finding it hard on one side and you can actually change your leg positioning. [02:54:50] So you'll see I end up pummeling my top leg and then retract my right leg. I come out on this [02:55:00] side to connect to K Guard and pummeling my other leg back in front of the armpit again.[02:55:10]

[02:55:14] And this might be another example of the armbar. Ah yes, the armbar from when someone holds [02:55:20] your far leg. So, you can see my legs being blocked from getting into the armpit or from swinging over the top to push on the chest. [02:55:30] So, often you can swing wide, capture the arm. The tricep or elbow and really wide and lift your hips up with this swing and then you can kick and pull.

[02:55:39] There [02:55:40] we are. Okay. And now I've got the arm lock ready to curl in, potentially finish, but he actually pulls free from that. Um, so I missed that, but [02:55:50] I'm back into the, the K guard. So you see, I finished with the K guard positioning. Lastly, lastly, for kneeling entries is just talking about De La Riva. I didn't have a great example of what I wanted to [02:56:00] show.

[02:56:00] This is the best one I had. At least from the footage that I've got in front of me. So my opponent's kneeling and sometimes I'll start putting my foot down like in the gap [02:56:10] where they would be going for, um, which would try and let me scoot around towards Delhivas. So between there, you know, he's kind of already going to start to [02:56:20] stand.

[02:56:20] So it's not the best example, but the gap that will be between their, um, heel and their butt. And you can start. Working towards De La Riva against a kneeling opponent from [02:56:30] there. And you see as my opponent begins to stand up, which is often caused as you start to make an angle, but as he began to stand up, that meant I went to De La Riva instead of K guard.

[02:56:39] So [02:56:40] K guard is really good, um, against someone who's standing. We often look for De La Riva, but there's other times we look for De La Riva too. All right, so that's entries against a kneeling opponent.

[02:56:49] Speaker 8: [02:56:50] [02:57:00] We're now working against an opponent who begins to stand up. The first [02:57:10] instance of this we're going to go through is combat based, which is basically where Ed steps up on one leg. It's kind of a block. It can work as a block. [02:57:20] If he's up on that leg, he can block my near leg and make it very difficult to attach the K guard on this far leg.

[02:57:25] Whereas if this leg was on the ground, then I have access [02:57:30] towards that leg. Okay, so how do we deal with this or what are our options from here? In reality, just looking for K guard would limit yourself a little too much. We're looking for K [02:57:40] guard, De La Riva, Reverse De La Riva. They're our main three. And then I'll also show something that ties in with our half guard series, which is different, um, instructional, but [02:57:50] using the Jedi mind trick that can work from here as well.

[02:57:52] Okay, so basically what we're going to look at is Whether, whether I can [02:58:00] get to K guard is going to depend on whether the knee is on this side of my hips or not. So if Ed brings the knee up, and it's on this side, it's going to be very difficult to [02:58:10] get to K guard. If I manage to get his knee centered, even just in the middle of my hips, I actually have reasonable access to [02:58:20] get towards this leg, okay?

[02:58:21] So whether his knee is there. And then we've also got, uh, whether we go into um, [02:58:30] reverse De La Riva or De La Riva. Okay. So oftentimes we can switch back Riva if he opens the space. So if he's, if he's lifted his hips up [02:58:40] when he does this, I can often swing back and get a very good De La Riva and Barambolo entry from this.

[02:58:48] While if I'm able to [02:58:50] pummel my foot under the armpit, I can often go straight into an invert from Reverse Delay Heel.[02:59:00]

[02:59:04] Let's first talk about our bottom leg positioning, or the one that we might put across towards K Gap. Now, [02:59:10] Ed may, What's, what does Ed want to do with this? If he can, he wants to step over this leg. I have to be wary that this position is almost a cross knee through pass. He's almost got that. [02:59:20] If he can step over the leg, he's gonna get me in a really bad position.

[02:59:23] Especially if he gets the underhook like he has here. So you need to be wary of what's going on. with your upper body and not letting him [02:59:30] get an underhook, and also worry what's happening with your leg here. So if we go back, I can keep my leg, I could put my leg right across the hip. I can have it kind of just [02:59:40] sitting just past the hip here, or sometimes you can even have it in front of the stomach.

[02:59:44] So with your knee down towards the ground in front of the stomach here, they call this the key mast position. [02:59:50] Some of the, some of the guys from Norway use this. And This one can be good. I find it a little harder to get to Kega if I'm doing this, but it can be good particularly [03:00:00] if I want to start to switch towards, back towards Delaheven.

[03:00:04] And by putting your foot here, it's very hard for Ed to step over. It's hard for him to push that off, okay? [03:00:10] I personally will often put my foot just past the hip here, okay? So it's like my, that, the outstep of my foot will sit on the top of the [03:00:20] thigh. So if Ed tries to push that down where he is, It's going to be sort of difficult.

[03:00:24] He could do it, but he would have to step backwards. Yeah, he has to step back to push my leg down. [03:00:30] And when he does that, that's my time to retract my knee to my chest. Okay. I don't want to keep that there. I want to pull this back now. Okay. I don't want to let him step over the leg. Okay. [03:00:40] So in this scenario, I don't actually put it dangling past the hip because here you can just almost push it down on the spot.

[03:00:46] Okay. You can slide that down. It's too big of a lever for him. Having it kind of [03:00:50] the outstep of my foot attached to the The hip kind of has to step back, when he steps back, I'll retract my leg and pummel it back in front of the arm.[03:01:00]

[03:01:02] My top leg, I can have usually as either a knee shield or even better, stepping on the armpit. If you can get the armpit, [03:01:10] this is excellent because I can elevate Ed. This is going to give me really good options to, to hook Ed. or a knee shield is kind of a backup. So if you need to [03:01:20] push my leg off and I can't control that and he starts to close the distance and a knee shield is an extra backup I've got here with the aim of going to a high knee shield though.

[03:01:29] Okay. [03:01:30] So eventually I'm wanting a high knee shield or potentially to step on the armpit. So my hands will really reinforce both shoulders, preventing Ed from getting any good sort [03:01:40] of underhook and always allowing space to step back in underneath this armpit. If I have to do it. Okay. One other thing to consider here [03:01:50] is this arm.

[03:01:50] Okay. So sometimes it will do, for example, it's my push my armpit or he's looking for an underhook. What we can often do is actually take a two on one. All right. If I take a [03:02:00] two on one and pull Ed's wrist somewhere near the midline, I am no longer too concerned about the cross knee through pass. Because if he tries to, he tries to, even if he [03:02:10] steps over my leg and he tries to pass here, he doesn't have control of my body at all.

[03:02:14] So I'm not in an extreme amount of danger, okay, whereas if you can get that underhook, I am in [03:02:20] danger. Alright, so, if we go back, a great control to look for, which will often come when you use a knee shield from here, is to take the wrist, [03:02:30] two on one, and take that across. And that can give us some good options to work back in towards something like a Delahigg.[03:02:40]

[03:02:46] So now I'm going to look at getting to Kega. So if I'm [03:02:50] doing well in framing Ed away, so I can get my foot under the armpit maybe, or even just a good knee shield that's blocking him, closing the gap while my [03:03:00] arms are in position, I will often look to try to get Ed's knee to the center of my hips. To do that, I kind of backheel off my right leg.

[03:03:09] So you can see here, [03:03:10] I backheel to scoot my hips down to the side. So it kind of moves my hips. in and squares me up towards the roof. From there, I [03:03:20] want to actually sit upwards. I want to, I can use my leg and his armpit a little bit. So I kind of kick up with this leg and I want to sit upwards and try to reach under the leg.

[03:03:29] Speaker 9: Okay. [03:03:30] Then when I fall to the side, I should have the leg and I've got the K guard position. Yeah. So we'll look at that from the side. It's done a little more[03:03:40]

[03:03:42] Speaker 8: but yeah, I'm going to back heel, so the knee goes in the center. Now I can start to attack the [03:03:50] freedom and the range to reach the leg. So I'll kick up, sit forward, and then I reach under the leg. Just, even if I just get my hand there, when I fall to the [03:04:00] side, I should scoop the leg up. My head goes towards the legs.

[03:04:04] I've got my leg folded. Even though his knee's here, his knee's up here. When I've got my other [03:04:10] leg under the armpit, and I'm here, I should still have a good ability to off balance and bring the knee up into the stomach for Kegel. What I don't want to do is [03:04:20] just go sideways. This is how I used to try this and I would always fail.

[03:04:23] If I go sideways for the leg here, even if I move out and I go here, it's very easy for Ed to sprawl your leg back. [03:04:30] I've lost that leg, or he could cross face me as well, okay? See how he cross faces. By, by staying frontal. I can sit forward and so [03:04:40] I should get a lot closer without threatening the leg so much, and I have other options that I can threaten with this too.

[03:04:45] Okay, so by going more here, I stop him retreating with my [03:04:50] leg, sit forward, I can reach the leg a lot easier that way than I can by curling sideways and reaching for the leg this way. One other advantage of [03:05:00] this is if I sit forward and Ed takes this leg back, it often lets me start to underhook. and attack the, this knee or leg.

[03:05:09] Okay. So it often [03:05:10] lets me get good access to this leg, which I can attack next. So Ed's got his knee in front. I've got, I'm framing his upper body, making enough space. I back heel to get my hips [03:05:20] into the center and the knee centered from here. I kick up, sit forward, reach towards the leg, fall to the side and connect to the [03:05:30] kicker.[03:05:40] [03:05:50] [03:06:00] [03:06:10] [03:06:20] [03:06:30] [03:06:40] [03:06:50] [03:07:00]

[03:07:01] So if we get a chance, maybe it's hard to get. Maybe I'm finding it hard to get the far leg. [03:07:10] Maybe I'm finding it hard to, to get my hips to the inside. To get the, to sit forward and get the far leg. So Ed's kind of continually tracking this way. [03:07:20] Or it might be that he's trying to kind of push this leg down.

[03:07:22] So, just go back one moment. I'm going to be looking, at most times, to palm my foot under [03:07:30] the armpit. This can elevate Ed's hips. So his hips are very low. He's basically sitting on his heel right now. So if I try to get a hook, sit [03:07:40] down, I can't get a reverse delta heeler hook. Okay. But when I lift up on his shoulder and curl in, now I can get my hook.

[03:07:48] Okay. I can also [03:07:50] reach my hand underneath at the same time I hook and I have room to reach my hand underneath. So I've really off balanced his weight. out to the side and slightly forwards. Okay. [03:08:00] So again, we're here. I'm trying to get K guard. I frame the armpit with my thumb, step, I push, hook, and now [03:08:10] I have excellent positioning to reach underneath, lift my shoulders and roll through reverse Telehema.

[03:08:18] So I'm trying to get to K [03:08:20] guard. I can't get it. I frame the shoulders, step on the armpit. And I'm going to lift as I lift. That's going to allow my foot to hook as a reverse Dela Hiva hooks on top of the [03:08:30] thigh. That's going to allow me to under hook the leg or grip the heel. And from here, I lift the heel up and roll through [03:08:40] out towards the back.

[03:08:42] We'll cover a little more on the invert in the reverse Dela Hiva section.[03:08:50] [03:09:00] [03:09:10] [03:09:20] [03:09:30] [03:09:40]

[03:09:44] So we can look to go towards Dela Hiva from here as well. Now, there's a few times you might do that. [03:09:50] If you get a torn one, often Ed, often from here, I feel confident to just step on the leg here, pendulum my left leg [03:10:00] and swing onto my left side. So now I have a, a De La Riva hook and I've got an angle from De La Riva.

[03:10:07] One thing that shows up quite a lot is [03:10:10] as you go towards reverse De La Riva, Ed starts to move backwards. So I start reaching, I start lifting and he's moving back. And that can be a great time [03:10:20] to grip the ankle with my right hand and then swing to my left hip, elevating his foot and keeping the leg in my right [03:10:30] hand.

[03:10:30] So this is actually a better De La Riva to get to than if I was holding on with my left hand. I've actually got his leg elevated like so, and I'm above [03:10:40] the line of his knee here, which means I'm a bit further along with him. the pathway towards the back. Okay, so for that one, we might be [03:10:50] looking, I've gone from here, I try to go reverse de la jiva, or even I just notice, so your knee's still in front, blocking the, blocking the key [03:11:00] guard, he starts to back away, I can grab the ankle.

[03:11:04] I've got the option to reverse de la jiva, but I see he's backing away so far that instead I will step on the leg [03:11:10] and pivot my hips and lift the leg at the same time. So it's a little. A little like a pendulum here will take me from my right side to my left side. And [03:11:20] I want the foot lifting up. Once more.

[03:11:25] Once I step on the hip, so he can't come forward at me now, I can swing to [03:11:30] the other side. Hook in front of the thigh, I have delta heaver, and I can start to climb towards the back foot.[03:11:40] [03:11:50] [03:12:00] [03:12:10] [03:12:20] [03:12:30] [03:12:40] [03:12:50]

[03:12:58] So in summary, our [03:13:00] main attacks against the combat base, I'm going to try, if I can, to use my, my leg to scoop my hips inside the knee, sit forward [03:13:10] and attach the far leg for Kega. If Ed brings his knee in quite far, making that difficult, often it's easier to then step. [03:13:20] and change sides into De La Riva or if you manage to get something like a 2 on 1 that's a very easy transition to do as well if you [03:13:30] manage to pummel under the armpit so obviously there's this battle going on and he's fighting my leg and I manage to step on the armpit I can start to elevate reverse De La Riva [03:13:40] hook and spin and if you Um, if you're going for that, sometimes you kind of elevate in my back away, but I can [03:13:50] grab the ankle.

[03:13:50] I can step again, swing and have Delahevo with the leg elevated.[03:14:00]

[03:14:09] Speaker 10: [03:14:10] We can go for the Jedi mind trick, which is a often a half guard technique, although we actually won't necessarily take our feet out into the half guard position. [03:14:20] Um, two ways we can do this. Either I take the two on one. Or, I get a, um, hook around the, [03:14:30] the thigh at first, okay? And the knee, forcing the knee to the inside, okay?

[03:14:34] Speaker 8: So, it's going to be essential with this that I don't give an underhook. If Ed takes an underhook, [03:14:40] I end up in a bad spot. This is why I, I like this move, but it's more risky. I tend to prefer staying with, uh, the other attacks just because, you know, If I mess them up, [03:14:50] I don't end up in such a bad position.

[03:14:51] If I mess this one up, it can be bad. Okay. You end up in a deep knee through. Okay. So, but it can work really well and you can get out to the back. So if I get the, we'll [03:15:00] start off with the, the two on one here. So it's framing, take this arm away. What I want to do is actually jam my knee and force it into a knee [03:15:10] cut position, but he doesn't have the underhook.

[03:15:12] Okay. So you see that he's, he's knees up. I take my knee, to the back of his knee and I force it down to the [03:15:20] inside trying to jam so you should see my knee poking through that gap okay at the same time I'm keeping my foot in front of the hip still all right so again [03:15:30] here my foot goes just a little bit past the hip now and I drag that knee across and because I've dealt with this arm I should have access to the far hip [03:15:40] okay Ed can't underhook and block me which would be very bad he can keep going for a knee cut here but he won't block this I can sit up and reach the hip.

[03:15:49] [03:15:50] Once I reach the hip, so I'm reaching over to the far hip bone, I can start to block this leg or pull in. So I basically want to stop Ed standing up here [03:16:00] and putting his knee to the other side. If he puts his knee across my body, okay, this would be bad. So I want to keep that connected to the side of the, of the leg here, pull [03:16:10] it into me or sometimes pushing, but let me try and take that leg across now.

[03:16:14] I'm stuck to the side of the leg, right? From here I want to bump him forward. So we'll turn [03:16:20] around.

[03:16:23] So from here I'm going to knee Ed in the butt to bring his hips forward so I can start to get a hook [03:16:30] behind his back like a crab ride style hook. I'm going to knee him in the butt here, his hips lift, I lift my knee up and hook behind. Okay, [03:16:40] you see my knees on the outside and my foot's on the inside just like in crab ride.

[03:16:45] Don't let your leg go down and through, because Ed could backstep here, [03:16:50] and then he's in the saddle, or he could attack my leg. So, I keep my knee high. Try to take the saddle now. See how my knee [03:17:00] stays above the line of his hip, so try to backstep to saddle. He doesn't get over the line of my knee. Go to saddle.[03:17:10]

[03:17:12] My knee never gets caught like that, right? Whereas when I go back, if my knee drops through, now he back steps to settle. Okay, so I [03:17:20] really like to focus on the top leg here. So just have a look from this angle as I enter. But here, I take the [03:17:30] two on one, I jam the knee down, sit up, and grip the hip. I'm gonna knee him in the butt, and as he tries, if he wants to try to get settled, [03:17:40] he's not gonna get it.

[03:17:41] I'm going to hook the leg. If he stays down and doesn't go for settle, that's fine. I'm going to hook the leg anyway, keeping my knee out. So I'm ready for that back step. Once I'm [03:17:50] here, I can take, take my bottom leg out and start to come out towards the back. Another option, slightly more risky [03:18:00] than the two on one is to elevate and hook around the leg with my arm.

[03:18:04] So if I don't have access to a two on one, maybe it's just not giving me that grip. And I still want to go for this [03:18:10] technique, then I need to hide my underhook in some way and still force his knee inside. Last time I used my leg, but here without having the two on one, I'm at risk [03:18:20] of really closing this gap.

[03:18:21] So I don't want to do that now. I don't want to use my knee to bring the knee in. I want to use my arm. So I want to keep my legs framing so he can't close the gap with [03:18:30] my legs. And I make space enough that I can start to reach under this leg. Okay. So often by lifting up, pushing away. I can reach under this leg [03:18:40] and then I can start to use my arm to guide the leg to the inside.

[03:18:45] So my arm will guide the leg to the knee, to the inside. My knee will bump it [03:18:50] forward. Okay. Like so. So my arm forces the knee to the inside. My knee will bump it forward. Like so. Okay. Now that it's bumped forward, [03:19:00] I'm not feeling a huge threat for the underarm. So I can let go and reach here. Be mindful not to open this gap, but to keep my shoulder tight [03:19:10] and my right leg back, heeling against his thigh.

[03:19:13] Okay. So it's kind of like a push pull here. Now I take the far hip, [03:19:20] take my knee back and I start threading this hook. Looking to take the back. So the second version, I elevate, [03:19:30] reach underneath the leg. Force the knee to the inside, knee up the butt, as I curl my left on my right foot, [03:19:40] bringing his hips close to me, capturing the hip, moving my leg, my knee back, head away, so that I can tumble, a crab ride hook, [03:19:50] and then retract my bottom leg, taking the back.[03:20:00] [03:20:10] [03:20:20] [03:20:30] [03:20:40]

[03:20:44] We're now going through K guard entries against a standing opponent, and [03:20:50] Really, quite a few of these are going to be from reverse de la jiva. We'll cover them in detail in the de jiva sections, but I [03:21:00] will also just cover a general entry against a standing opponent as well. All right, so Ed's here, and I want to get to Kegar.

[03:21:09] It's very similar [03:21:10] to if he was kneeling, in that I want to make sure I separate this space between his elbow and his knee. So shoot my leg up. [03:21:20] If I'm able to do that, I can often enter Kegan from the standing position. So usually you're going to want to control an arm here. It's very, it's not, it's not like the kneeling [03:21:30] position in that I wouldn't just shoot my leg up.

[03:21:32] It's actually just going to allow him to control my leg. Okay. So against the standing opponent, I am going to want to get a two on one, like [03:21:40] almost, almost every time, I want to shoot the Kegan. Okay. Once I have that, it is somewhat similar. My hips are going to move out to the side and I try and pummel my right leg under this armpit as [03:21:50] my left foot goes across the hip, like so.

[03:21:53] Okay. From here, so my foot's going across the hip. I'm expecting Ed to start to try to fight that and [03:22:00] I'm ready to pummel my foot over and inside to the armpit. At the same time, if he's not doing that, that's fine. I can start reaching under the legs. I almost pull myself towards north [03:22:10] south. Okay. As I reach under the leg, shoot my knee under, and I've now got K guard position.

[03:22:16] Again, we're going to control the arm. Often if our opponent's [03:22:20] controlling, reaching towards us, we can control the back of the elbows. This is a great time to do it. As well, hips out to the side, shoot your leg across, and [03:22:30] try to pummel your other leg underneath. Okay, if you can get that shoulder, that's great.

[03:22:34] I can then start to Attach to the leg. Again, if I don't have access to the shoulder [03:22:40] and it stays back with that arm, that's fine. I can continue to reach under the leg, bring my knee under to make sure your foot stays on the outside. Knee goes underneath. I [03:22:50] attach to the knee and I get to the K guard positioning.[03:23:00] [03:23:10] [03:23:20] [03:23:30]

[03:23:34] Speaker 10: So a lot of the time it's going to be very difficult to shoot to K guard because our opponent will block our leg. [03:23:40] from having access, especially against someone standing, it's much easier when they're kneeling, it's easier when they're on the ground because you can kind of separate, they're less mobile and it's, [03:23:50] there's a lot more space to push your leg down through when they're standing.

[03:23:53] Speaker 8: Okay, so if I was here, even if I could get the arm, a lot of the time if I shoot, yeah, like Ed here [03:24:00] has closed his elbow to his knee, if I try to shoot into a position for K guard, you'll see I'll miss, okay, I don't get up into the hip and he can quite easily push my leg down. A lot of [03:24:10] times it's just a better option to look towards De La Riva instead of Kegar.

[03:24:13] So instead of looking to attach to the hip, I'm going to look to attach to the knee. Okay, so [03:24:20] get into stance again, here I might look to pull myself into a De La Riva position like so. So I'm attaching with a hook underneath like so and gripping [03:24:30] onto the leg, making it difficult for it to retract. Now we're going to have a whole section on De La Riva, so we're not going to go into a lot of details about this.

[03:24:38] I will just show the, [03:24:40] uh, briefly the K guard entries. But again, if you want more detail on them from De La Riva, it fits into that system better. So we'll do that then. Okay. So usually if [03:24:50] we want to go to K guard from De La Riva, we're going to have to go underhook De La Riva. Okay. From here, I can go then to pushing the knee.

[03:24:59] [03:25:00] So when I go underhook De La Riva. I block Ed's knee going forward. I retract my hips, drop my knee on the inside. This is a shallow K guard. We will cover [03:25:10] this a little bit later, uh, in the K guard section, but I can shoot my foot up to the hip and my knee inside and we can get to [03:25:20] regular K guard from here as well.

[03:25:22] Okay, so again, if you do go down a heaver, the pathway is to underhook first. [03:25:30] Block them advancing second as you retract your foot and knee to the inside. So obviously for K guard I need my knee on the inside. I'm [03:25:40] pulling my knee out and dropping it on the inside with my foot staying on the outside. From here, I've got shallow K guard or I could shoot by spinning more towards north [03:25:50] south.

[03:25:50] I can shoot my foot up towards the hip and knee coming to the inside as I spin back. [03:26:00] Yeah.[03:26:10] [03:26:20] [03:26:30] [03:26:40] [03:26:50] [03:27:00] [03:27:10] [03:27:20] [03:27:30] [03:27:40]

[03:27:41] Speaker 10: Alright, we can enter from Reverse De La Riva, again we'll cover this in more detail in the Reverse De La Riva section, but just [03:27:50] to be aware of our options from here for when we cover that later. So obviously my leg is being trapped. I usually want my foot on the outside, but it's managed to push that leg down [03:28:00] and go to Reverse De La Riva.

[03:28:01] Speaker 8: We can go to K guard from here. Again, usually I'm going to want to pummel my foot. to the armpit. Extend. And then I need to get [03:28:10] usually because he's going across me through his knees in the way. So by extending, I give myself a little more room. I usually want to then reach to the leg while keeping [03:28:20] the frame in so he can't under book as I do that.

[03:28:22] And then I pull myself to the center as I reach my foot across towards the fire. Okay, or some of [03:28:30] the and then pull myself. So his knee is now in the center. Okay, if he hasn't stepped too far away here, often then when I sit forward, I can reach that leg [03:28:40] and roll through in a very similar manner to how we did, uh, from the combat based position.

[03:28:44] Our other option from reverse De La Riva is to actually fold this leg [03:28:50] across and go K guard on this particular leg. I'm just going to take my right leg out as I invert. Okay, this is a very strong action, so I'm going to extend, I fold my leg across, [03:29:00] which will become. A K guard hook as I spin. Okay. So I extend under hook, my leg folds across and I take my inside leg out [03:29:10] through and look to puddle the far armpit as I roll through attaching into a very solid K guard.

[03:29:17] So again with this one we begin the [03:29:20] invert and I immediately fold my leg across, take my right leg out and I change so that I'm reaching under the legs. The head spinning all the [03:29:30] way through. All the way through, capturing the leg and my right leg shooting towards the far armpit and ending up in the KW [03:29:40] position.

[03:29:43] So [03:29:50] in[03:30:00] [03:30:10] [03:30:20] [03:30:30] [03:30:40]

[03:30:47] summary, against a standing opponent, if they [03:30:50] go against the edge, he gives me the space between his legs. elbows and his elbow and his knee, then I might be able to shoot the hips through, start to pummel, start looking to [03:31:00] capture the K guard position. Otherwise, you're usually going to have to look to go to De La Riva guard or reverse De La Riva guard, which may lead to K guard or obviously there's the other options you have from those [03:31:10] positions as well.

[03:31:10] So from De La Riva, it's usually shallow K, and then potentially up into the regular K guard. And from reverse De La Riva. [03:31:20] We're either taking our leg across, scooting to the middle, and sitting up, or we keep our leg folded across and spin through to [03:31:30] capture the K Bow position.[03:31:40]

[03:31:43] All right, let's have a look at combat base and standing entries. And this is In this [03:31:50] section, we're looking at like our options from combat base, not just for K guard, but for other options too. Okay. So the first one is K guard. So you can see here, Sean's getting [03:32:00] up into a combat base position. So he's left knees up.

[03:32:03] He's going to get up onto his right leg here. Okay, and then I mean, he's got the [03:32:10] knee forward. I want to get my, I want to attach to this far leg. So I circle to the side, I have [03:32:20] frame, and I can reach underneath the leg, and then from there, getting my hips up, I can start connecting my hands, working. Notice a [03:32:30] little shift here, just because I'm a little worried about pressure inwards here, I actually step so I can push on the stomach as opposed to having the foot past the hip.

[03:32:38] Once I got my foot. [03:32:40] My hand's connected. Okay. So if you just look at that again, my foot's kind of going past the hip. Once my hands connect, then I'm more thinking about pushing away. So I then step with the outstep [03:32:50] of my foot on his hips, which should be able to let me kind of push and pull. There you go.

[03:32:54] See that, that leg kind of pushed his hips up a little bit and this gave me room now, now that his hips are up [03:33:00] to start to attack. Another push gives me better, um, better opening. All right. [03:33:10] This would be another combat base to K Guard, I believe. We'll see. So, yep, here we are. So, well, not [03:33:20] necessarily combat, sort of combat base, um, but Steve is actually standing here, but I've got this foot past the hip.

[03:33:26] Okay, so he's, he's gone for a knee cut.[03:33:30]

[03:33:31] Often I will peel this arm off. This gives you, makes you much more secure cause you're no longer worried about the knee cut. If they knee cut but they don't have that arm for an underhook, you're in a [03:33:40] very safe position. Okay. But here I sit forward. Notice I, ideally I could scoot in a little bit more, um, ideally I could scoot my hips [03:33:50] a little more in, but at least, you For the most part, Steve's knee is no longer in front of me on this side, it's now in the center, so I've got a chance to attach to the leg.

[03:33:58] But I do have to go a little bit [03:34:00] sideways, as you can see here, and that does open me up for the cross face. So I probably should have been framing or ready to frame with my right arm to be dealing with the cross [03:34:10] face. But you've also got a chance to attack against the cross face too, as we do here. So now I actually decide to go for that arm, and try to.[03:34:20]

[03:34:20] attack that head arm position. All right, so again in combat base here and going for the K guard. [03:34:30] We'll see if I get in. Yeah, good. It looks like I'm going to be pummeling my leg through. And this is [03:34:40] when I change to the other side. Okay, but again, look at that and that particular entry.

[03:34:49] So [03:34:50] combat base foot goes past the hip. Squared my hips up. I don't know if you should be able to see that. I move my hips across. There we are. Okay, just [03:35:00] to get the knee in the center. Now I can sit forwards. Notice I'm not like swinging on the side, but I am sitting forwards. And then I can attach to the leg as I invert through.

[03:35:09] And then I've got to [03:35:10] try and pummel my legs in position.

[03:35:15] So I end up changing sides, um, as we talked about earlier in the kneeling [03:35:20] section. Let's look at De La Riva against Combat Base. So, here you can see Steve's in Combat Base. [03:35:30] And I've actually Because of my, I had must have just turned in. Let me see. Yeah, I was trying to turn in towards K guard, but I couldn't get to that leg.

[03:35:38] You can see I'm reaching towards the far leg. [03:35:40] I didn't feel like it was available. So I changed to this near leg and having that near leg with my left hand really gets me a good angle when I swing to the other side. Okay. So you can [03:35:50] see ideally actually elevate that leg, but he's actually stood up. So it swung me all the way around pretty much towards the back and to grab right via Della Hippa.

[03:35:59] [03:36:00] It's not always with that grip. Sometimes you change to our, sometimes we don't even grip at all until we get to the Delaheva. So in this case, I [03:36:10] got my Delaheva. In this case, I went towards K guard, changed, got my Delaheva hook, and then started to control the two on one to establish the position. [03:36:20] Here I'm going for K guard.

[03:36:22] And this can be a good option when you go for K guard and they drop you their knee in front too. So you'll see. knee comes forward here and on the [03:36:30] inside. So now it's actually killed my K guard entry. So I'm going to take that arm so I don't get the risk of the underhook and then swing on to my [03:36:40] other hip.

[03:36:41] All right, so I'm holding the arm here but then I can grab the leg and straight into the, usually these, these type of entries lead you quite well in [03:36:50] towards the barrombola. Back to combat base again. Let's see. This might be a different option. This might be back to, or to reverse De La Riva. Okay. [03:37:00] Um, So that was, um, switching from, we'll just watch that one small bit.[03:37:10]

[03:37:10] And sorry. And go combo base, the knee's too far, um, like it's too far to get to this leg. So I believe I wanted to swing back to [03:37:20] Della Hiva, but I realized that was not possible. So then I changed to underhook the leg, hook the leg here with my leg, and I can spin through for reverse Della Hiva. Make sure [03:37:30] I fold my top leg so I don't get caught with any sort of counter back take.

[03:37:35] And then a very strange finish to that one.[03:37:40]

[03:37:44] Alright, so this one I'm going for K guard, and it looks like I connect [03:37:50] to it on the far leg. So this is more like um, you could probably more say this is a reverse heaver or?

[03:37:59] Yes, I've [03:38:00] gone reverse stellar heaver here, against the knee cut, and then from the reverse stellar heaver. Taken my leg out and reached across to the leg for, for [03:38:10] K Guard. So there's certainly a lot of crossover between the knee cut from Reverse Teleheaver and the position you end up with in Combat Base.[03:38:20]

[03:38:26] Oh no, that's the same clip, sorry.[03:38:30]

[03:38:31] Alright, here's a shallow K Guard entry. Alright, so. We'll see a few shallow K guard entries. So now against the standing, from a standing Dela [03:38:40] Hiva, I pressure the knee. I'm going to reach to the, usually I reach to the back of the knee. I didn't in this instance, but I underhook the leg. [03:38:50] Push on the knee to prevent my opponent driving that knee forward.

[03:38:53] We cover this in more detail in the Dela Hiva section. And then my hips can drop back until my foot's on the outside and knees on [03:39:00] the inside. So it's like K guard you would have on the thigh, but now we're just on the shin. and I can connect my hands similar to we would on the leg and now we're in good position [03:39:10] to attack.

[03:39:13] This is another variant of, well, very similar one, although I don't quite commit to the shell okay, but [03:39:20] same entry from the ADCC trials. So I reach behind the knee, underhook the leg, I push to retract my hips, except I take my leg all the way [03:39:30] through, which as I talk about in the De La Riva section, uh, it's not actually the best idea.

[03:39:36] I wouldn't do that these days. I'll have one more look [03:39:40] at a shallow K guard entry. So here, my, Lockie's pinned my leg so I can reach the back of the knee. So I can get my [03:39:50] underhook in a moment. So I should be able to soon. Once my, once I'm happy with the positioning of my right leg, I should be able to underhook with my left arm.

[03:39:56] There we go. And then I want to, once I'm happy he [03:40:00] can't retreat. So it looks like he's looking, trying to pull his leg away. I'm happy that I've got that. Okay, now I can start pushing to get my hips out, which will help me get my foot to the [03:40:10] outside. Knee to the inside. I'm almost losing this, so I think I'm going to pull his leg across.

[03:40:15] Or I might get back into position again, actually. Underhooking again. Hipping out. Okay, there [03:40:20] we go. And now I've actually got that shallow K guard position. Alright.

[03:40:25] Speaker 4: [03:40:30] [03:40:40] We're now talking about using K guard, uh, in guard retention. It's actually can be some of the best ways to get to K guard, uh, when your opponent [03:40:50] starts trying to pressure in to pass your guard. That's often when they give you a chance to get good control and feed your leg into position to, to start to recover and also get to K guard.[03:41:00]

[03:41:00] So let's have a look now. Start with head here. Go north south first. We're actually going to cover three different. areas here. Okay, so I'm going to cover north [03:41:10] south and using my legs to pummel back from north south and also get into the K guard position. We'll [03:41:20] work against under the legs passes, so if Ed starts to go under the legs, now we can start to use that to get into K guard and also against [03:41:30] the leg drag.

[03:41:30] Usually if Ed's standing up, he looks to drag a leg And I can often use that action to start to get into, [03:41:40] you know,[03:41:50]

[03:41:51] So from north south, I have my frames here. And, uh, so I usually want to, I'm like starting from late [03:42:00] stage. Obviously you try to capture halfway through this technique. I'm going to show you kind of from near the end of, or the worst case scenario and building back. Right, so. I [03:42:10] have frames under Ed's armpit here and that just stops him fully closing the gap with my, with his chest on my chest and it's often enough that if I have my [03:42:20] grip over his scapula and my forearms under his shoulder that I can start to bring my knees underneath like so, okay.

[03:42:28] So when I get my knees [03:42:30] underneath, when I want to get to K guard, so I'm actually thinking about attacking here as well. I want to get to K guard. I want to stop Ed from retracting as we've talked about before. So I don't want to just [03:42:40] push up with my knees. I want to try to get it. So my knees start to drive him forward a little bit.

[03:42:45] Okay. So I'm going to change my knee, not just pushing up, but putting behind the [03:42:50] armpit and actually pulling down on the arm to reinforce that. Okay. So move back relative to me now. I'm pretty stuck to him here compared to like here and move back and [03:43:00] it's going to disengage. Okay. So I really want my knee poking up.

[03:43:04] Forward like that. Once I have that, and it can be either side here, I want to push [03:43:10] up and fold my foot underneath. Okay, my foot takes over the role of the knee, or it even reinforces it. Okay, so I push with my [03:43:20] knee, and my foot folds across, trying to keep my knee, I think my knee's on one side of his shoulder, and foot on the other.

[03:43:26] What you don't want to do is take your foot across here, I give him a gap to actually [03:43:30] close the gap and pass. This should still stay locked off, okay? So, I'm just folding my leg across, but keeping my foot on the outside, okay? [03:43:40] Once that's in position, I can start to almost put my ankles locked together, so my knees come further through, and this is quite a strong, [03:43:50] uh, structure to bring head forward, correct?

[03:43:53] So, I can pull here, take my head out to the side, and work to step. [03:44:00] on that armpit and take my other leg closer to the leg. All right, so you can see I'm getting basically the positioning for K guard and the fact I'm stepped on his armpit still makes it difficult for Ed to [03:44:10] retract out of the position.

[03:44:11] Okay, now at a certain point through this, you're going to want to reach underneath the leg to attach to the leg. Okay, not too early, not [03:44:20] like, not while my arms are doing most of the framing, but as I start to get good positioning here, now might be a good time to start to reach towards the [03:44:30] leg, okay.

[03:44:30] Reach as your head starts to pop it, okay. You can see actually as I bring his, I can't reach because he's sitting on his heels right now, but [03:44:40] if I bring his weight forward a little, I can get that gap to reach. If you spin out to recover, now I can't, I'm actually going to have a harder Kegel because it's a long [03:44:50] way to reach, easier to want to do that just as my head.

[03:44:55] Starts to pop out. Okay. Once I'm reaching to that leg, I can start stepping on [03:45:00] the armpit. Climbing my foot closer to the hips and my knee ends up underneath and entering the Kegout position. So again, I get my shoulder frames [03:45:10] with my gripping over the scapula or bring my knees up shins attached and get my knee behind one shoulder pushing it forward folding my foot underneath [03:45:20] and Attaching that bringing my knee up to close the gap.

[03:45:22] So there's no space here and to pass through. From here, I'm starting to free my knee a bit more, hooking with [03:45:30] my ankle, extending, taking my head away, connecting to the leg and stepping on the armpit as I climb through towards K back. In reality, [03:45:40] you know, if Ed was passing around towards north south, he might do this with more distance.

[03:45:44] I might be like here, I'm getting my legs already, you can see I'm not as far through the pass and I'm already [03:45:50] starting to get my attack going.[03:46:00] [03:46:10] [03:46:20] [03:46:30] [03:46:40] [03:46:50] [03:47:00] [03:47:10]

[03:47:14] Again, someone who passes under the legs. So it's going under the legs here. [03:47:20] Often one of the first things I'm looking to do is get my knee down to the ground and get its hand above, I say the ground, like near the ground and get his [03:47:30] hand above the line of my knee. Okay. So. Often we look for that quite early, Ed starts to go under the legs and I start trying to free my knee, like so, okay, so I'm [03:47:40] pushing so he doesn't control that space from here to the ground.

[03:47:43] Now, in a scenario like this, if Ed keeps going forward and keeps trying to pass, he often actually gives me access [03:47:50] to a, to a K guard entry. So we can, we can look to, once we know we're safe from the pass, once you get your knee free. And you keep it down. You should feel [03:48:00] reasonably safe. If he drives forward, it's not really going to set anything up for him.

[03:48:04] Okay. And I'm going to look, I basically just want to take, I want to eventually get my [03:48:10] foot from in front of his shoulder to behind his shoulder. Okay. To do that, I need to pummel under this arm, right? So if Ed starts to drive forward, I might pull the arm, [03:48:20] use my foot, to hook and you can see I can now pummel my leg through and now I have access.

[03:48:25] I've got his shoulder and start pulling him forward and attaching to the leg. [03:48:30] There's some different ways you might go about this. You can check out our guard retention anthology for a bit more detail on the defending the underleg pass. But [03:48:40] if I get the, the knee free here, I could pummel over the top of the arm like that.

[03:48:45] Sometimes you can pummel your knee through underneath and then start to climb [03:48:50] getting the armpit first. and exposing this space between the shoulder and the hip so I can start to climb and get into the K guard position.[03:49:00] [03:49:10] [03:49:20] [03:49:30] [03:49:40] [03:49:50]

[03:49:50] Last retention, uh, to K guard entry we're looking at is the, from a leg drag. Okay. So if Ed was to pull my leg [03:50:00] across the body like this, obviously this is not good, but as he's going for that, if you see it coming, so especially from something like but even from an open guard. [03:50:10] So, as he pulls my leg across, if I can get my other foot with the knee on the inside foot on the outside, this is going to be great.

[03:50:16] It just requires me to spin towards north south, yeah, [03:50:20] so you can see that. As my leg starts to get pulled across, if I spin myself towards north south, I can start to shoot my, my knee underneath and foot to the outside, [03:50:30] yeah. You see this a lot from something like De La Riva, it goes two on one on my far leg, okay.

[03:50:36] Do that. Spin. Shoot through, and I get into the Keg [03:50:40] Artificial. So with this spin, you have to have an underhook of the, of the leg. I can't spin my hips away without that. I'm actually using my arm to help me spin. [03:50:50] Ed's kind of assisting me. He's pulling my hips up and across like that. So I just go with it.

[03:50:55] I lift my, I spin my hips away. Okay. Like so. [03:51:00] You can see, as I do that, I take the Della Eva hook off. Okay, if I kick the Della Eva hook. It would actually like stick me and I'm in a, I'm getting put in a bad position. So as I [03:51:10] feel that I take the leg off away and then I just, my knees now tucked. I can shoot my knee in.

[03:51:18] You get to the point where my foot's on one [03:51:20] side, knees on the other. I grabbed the back of the knee and I shoot through into position. So I want to have my leg down for this. So when Ed pulls, he's pulling upwards, [03:51:30] right? Like this, this helps pull my hip up. So we go again. If your leg's too high, and he goes, like, I can't, he's almost [03:51:40] like pushing it down and across now, it doesn't give me any momentum to spin.

[03:51:43] So if he goes for that now, I just have like, a difficult time getting that, uh, that angle. If I start him with my leg [03:51:50] back, and he goes for the leg drag, he'll almost pull me up, and into position.[03:52:00]

[03:52:01] Speaker 11: Just looking at, entering K guard from, uh, Retention, which is actually a very common and good time to, to try to enter. So as you're [03:52:10] recovering, your opponent's pressuring in, you can often get your foot across their body. So, here you can see my opponent's working towards the north south position, which is an [03:52:20] extremely common time to work for it.

[03:52:22] And as we do that, I've managed to pull my foot across the body. So I noticed the knees on one side, foots on the other. So if I [03:52:30] can then spin my head all the way through, I should be able to pick up this far leg and my leg will be in position to see that leg that I had across that knee is going to start to work [03:52:40] underneath.

[03:52:42] And there we are. So see the knees gone underneath foots on the outside, and I'm now in Kegard. So [03:52:50] again,

[03:52:54] Sorry, I'll just roll that back, so. North south, put the foot across the body, knee on [03:53:00] one side, foot on the other. Spin through, and collect the leg, as you do that.[03:53:10]

[03:53:10] Similar scenario here. I was actually trying to enter, and for whatever reason, that initial entry, Did not work. Looks like my opponent's kind of [03:53:20] pushed my, my legs away and we end up in this north south position. I managed to get one foot across the hip, keeping the knee flared. So you can see my opponent [03:53:30] wants to burrow in, you know, put their head through, but they can't because, well, if they go forward, my legs on the outside and I can spin my head away.

[03:53:37] Okay. [03:53:40] So you can see I use that positioning to actually bring my opponent's weight forward here. And that exposes the leg, okay? So [03:53:50] see me using that, this leg, and my arms, everything kind of tries to swing my opponent's weight forward to make his hips lift up. Okay, there we are, and then I can lift, [03:54:00] attach to the leg, and get into K guard.

[03:54:04] And then to the Barambola. Again, here. Framing from [03:54:10] north south, foot comes across, you can see it just poking through there, and then into an entry. Okay, so, these are all basically the same idea. I'm gonna, it's [03:54:20] gonna be my right foot that I pummel, so I make sure I, you make sure you keep their shoulders, there's enough, shoulders up with your frames, look at that forearm frame underneath the, gripping onto the scapula there, [03:54:30] and then that gives me enough room for my foot.

[03:54:32] Alright, you can just see the edge of my foot here, poking through now. Alright. Once my foot's there, I swing my head away and pick up the leg in the process of [03:54:40] doing that.

[03:54:44] And this is one from under the legs. So I don't really do it from all the way in and under [03:54:50] the legs pass, but basically once you free your legs from it, your knee from an under the legs pass, trying to get your knee down towards the ground and to the inside. There we go. Okay. So once my knees right underneath here, [03:55:00] he's still under the leg technically, but with my knee jammed in there, I have a good chance at pulling up into the K guard position or backside 50 [03:55:10] 50.

[03:55:14] Speaker 4: The summary of entries into K guard. From a kneeling position, [03:55:20] we have closed guard, where we can get our sheath in front, lock them retracting, get our hips out, prevent the cross face, work a knee underneath, foot to [03:55:30] the outside, and get into the K guard position. From, from an open guard, 2 on 1, I want to get my foot past the [03:55:40] hip and my hips out to the side.

[03:55:42] With a hip escape, I'm looking to pummel to win. Good. inside positioning on this particular arm. From here I can start to pull [03:55:50] it forward as I reach for the leg or if he's reaching for a cross face sometimes I can start to roll through, invert and [03:56:00] take the leg from there. If he's sitting back and not giving me any access towards K guard, often from there [03:56:10] I can start working Riva and then he'll usually step up and I take the De La Riva guard.

[03:56:18] When looking for K [03:56:20] guard against an kneeling opponent, if they start to sprawl, we often keep our nice high knee shield, retract our leg to the ground, make space to spin [03:56:30] underneath. We can attack to the far arm, far leg sorry, or to the same side leg.

[03:56:38] Against combat base. [03:56:40] We put our foot just past the hip. From here, we have the option to, we want to make sure we frame and prevent our opponent getting [03:56:50] inside, inside position or in trouble with the uh, underhook. I can frame with my leg, I can move my hips to the center, forward, and roll through into kick guard.[03:57:00]

[03:57:00] I can step on the armpit, get a reverse delta heeble hook, and spin through. Or, I can start looking to [03:57:10] transition back into De La Riva and attack from De La Riva. When Ed is standing, if I can open the space between his [03:57:20] knee and his elbow, then I can start to scoot to the side, shoot my leg past, spin underneath, and shoot my knee in towards Keigo.[03:57:30]

[03:57:30] If he blocks that space, then I'm usually gonna look to go for dva. Okay. We have options from dva, obviously. One of 'em is that we [03:57:40] underhook go to Shallow K Guard, which we have some options from there, or we potentially shoot that back up into a regular C Guard particularly that was [03:57:50] facing. Then we have from reverse DHEA at two main options of getting to Kaga.

[03:57:56] From here, I can. I can take my leg across, [03:58:00] reach to the knee, scoot in, and roll through to Kegard. Or, I can start to invert, fold my leg across, [03:58:10] take my original leg out, under the far arm slip, and get good position.[03:58:20]

[03:58:25] Alright, we're now working from the Kegard position, so I've essentially connected [03:58:30] my hands, I've got my knee inside, foot on the outside, and out. how to get into offense from here. All right, so we'll break this section down into [03:58:40] a few different things. We'll go through some concepts and some strategy that we want to focus on from here.

[03:58:46] At first, we're going to go through how to get the knee from the [03:58:50] ground up onto our stomach. Okay, so how to go from here to have the knee onto our stomach. What are we going to do to make sure that can happen? Now, once we have the knee on the [03:59:00] stomach, We'll then go through our offensive options that we've got from, from here, right?

[03:59:04] So there's three main things we'll look for once the knee is up. We [03:59:10] either swing over and look for backside 50 50 here, where I'm going to start to usually look for heel hook or, or into just a 50 50 entry.[03:59:20]

[03:59:22] We can look to go underneath into a leg entanglement, essentially into X guard, or, or. [03:59:30] I can look to pass the leg across here into 70 30 position where I can, again, start looking to go to [03:59:40] backside 50 50, or I could look to start to go towards the back, or I could look to get up and start to come on top for a sweep.

[03:59:49] [03:59:50] Okay, so obviously we're not covering the 70 30 position. Okay, that's a separate section. We'll show you how to get to here. We'll also cover what to do from shallow K guard, [04:00:00] how to start to attack from here. Okay, so the entries into shallow K guard, we'll cover it a little bit earlier, but it's really covered mostly as part of the De La Riva section, right?

[04:00:09] But once we're [04:00:10] in this shallow K guard, how do we start to attack from here? And lastly, we'll cover troubleshooting and retention. So when there's certain things people will [04:00:20] do to counter once you go in towards K guard, what can we do from there? So in general progression, we're going to get the knee. We need to get the knee onto our stomach.

[04:00:28] Okay. So I need to, to [04:00:30] work the knee up to the stomach. That's the next thing we'll cover is, is how to do that. If he's standing. So sometimes you've entered K guard and they're standing, then the knees already up. Okay. So [04:00:40] we can kind of follow some, follow on with some of the options we're about to go through anyway, but let's just go back to the knee on the stomach.

[04:00:47] So we're kind of looking to get into a position like this [04:00:50] and what option you look to do from here is really dependent on what you. prefer in terms of your, uh, attacks. Okay. If you really like to go for, for [04:01:00] leg locks, then often you're really going to look for the backside 50 50 entry. Okay. If you prefer to sweep and get on top, top and not play the leg lock game, [04:01:10] you're much more likely to scoot yourself under and go towards, uh, X guard towards getting up.

[04:01:17] Whereas if you're more looking to [04:01:20] take the back or potentially, so if you want to take the back, we're going to look to take it So that's my style. I'm going to be looking to get the leg across my body to expose [04:01:30] the back or potentially you might be looking to this. Even if you want to go towards backside 50 50 often, it's an easier entry from going 70 30 to get back [04:01:40] into backside 50 50.

[04:01:42] That said, you really need to have all of these options available. People can block you from going to one and you need to mix these together if [04:01:50] you want to have effective attacks.

[04:01:57] Let's now talk about getting the knee to [04:02:00] the stomach. First off, where do I want the knee? I want it low down on the stomach. So, I want, when I get the knee on the stomach, I want it to come up like [04:02:10] here. I want it locked down, low stomach area. Okay, this gives me access with my legs to chop over the top.

[04:02:17] Not so low. I don't want to put it [04:02:20] below the line of my hips. Now he can start to run and I, I'll actually lose the leg if I try to attach to it. Okay. So, so when I bring the knee on the stomach, I want [04:02:30] to kind of low, but not too low. I've got my, my leg here hooking still at the hip to kind of slow down his retreat in case, in case he tries to retreat again.

[04:02:38] So he tries to run away [04:02:40] and see my legs kind of hooked here, assisting me as well as my arms. Great. So if you bring the leg too high, If I bring it up here, like near my shoulder [04:02:50] line or middle of my chest, you'll see it's very hard to swing my leg over and actually chop. I won't be able to get to something like backside 50 50.

[04:02:57] I've eliminated one of the options that I wanted to go [04:03:00] for. So when we bring the, let me put that back down, when we bring the knee up, we're kind of looking to use our hands and pull it like this. See I'm using my [04:03:10] lat to close my elbow down. I should end up with my elbows really pretty much closed down next to my side.

[04:03:16] Not up here where I'd have my elbows open, alright? So, [04:03:20] we're gonna be looking to go like this. So to do this, you're gonna want the leg to be light. So if Ed's got all his weight on the leg, and he's leaning [04:03:30] this way, I'm not going to be able to move the leg with my arms. I'm gonna try to use my legs the best I can by pulling towards me.

[04:03:38] So I'm hooking with my foot [04:03:40] behind the back of the shoulder. Actually, I'll just turn, I'll show that. So it's that same leg position we used a lot with our entry, I'm going to be feeding [04:03:50] through and hooking so I can pull forward, if I pull my knees to my chest, it brings Ed's weight forward like that, right?

[04:03:57] So I want to, as I've [04:04:00] connected my hands together, I want to pull Ed's weight towards me. A lot of it's going to come from this top leg. And once I've got that, I can then. I'm kind of loading him [04:04:10] up. I can then push away with my legs this way. You can see, like, my knee extends out this way. So if you go back, end of the foot in, [04:04:20] load off that way.

[04:04:20] Okay, already it's, without even holding his leg, I've made his knee lift up. So if he's got heavy weight on that leg, if I can use my legs well, I can pull in and I can [04:04:30] start making the knee lift up. Okay. Now, with the addition of my hands there, I can obviously guide that into really good position. It [04:04:40] is really important that this knee does drop underneath.

[04:04:42] Again, if your knee's out here, if I do this same action, I haven't really got anywhere. In fact, I've given him a chance to go [04:04:50] under my leg And start to pass, okay? So I need to have my knee staying underneath, like so, okay? At a certain point, it keeps him from [04:05:00] dropping his weight back, okay? So even my knee locking underneath the hips stops him dropping his weight here.

[04:05:05] If I'm staying with my knee kind of shallow, like this, he drops his weight back, I might get [04:05:10] put back to an earlier position. Now, if I'm having trouble using this action, so I try to pull in, maybe it's sitting back on his heels too [04:05:20] much. Okay. So sometimes I will bring my hips up in to kind of get a bit of momentum to this.

[04:05:25] Okay. So sometimes I've come, come in like this, stay back, stay [04:05:30] heavy on this side. Good. So sometimes from here, my hips come in. Okay. This allows me to push him a little bit. And then as he pushes back against me to keep his balance, [04:05:40] I get momentum to curl in and off balance. One last thing you can do, which does occasionally happen is you can [04:05:50] sometimes kick them.

[04:05:50] Sometimes Ed will control my leg. I didn't want this to happen, but I've got everything in position. Sometimes I step on the stomach here and I push and notice [04:06:00] the leg starts to, it's hard for him to keep heavy on his knee here. Okay. So we go back. You're trying to keep, keep up, hold my leg. I can push and lift the knee.

[04:06:09] Okay. [04:06:10] Once I lifted the knee, we'll talk about how to pummel this leg a little bit later, but I am looking to get back into good position and start to attack. One last option [04:06:20] is to actually step under this armpit. This works really well if you can. Be careful swinging wide, but if you get the chance to, with your pummeling, [04:06:30] if I can step under this knee armpit, this will take his weight out.

[04:06:33] Very similar. In fact, it's a stronger action than this. If I can actually step under this armpit [04:06:40] with the outstep of my foot. Now I try and stay heavy on your leg. If I can push him away and get the knee up. on top of my stomach.[04:06:50] [04:07:00] [04:07:10] [04:07:20] [04:07:30]

[04:07:34] And now we're looking at pummeling our leg into position. So what if, what if I [04:07:40] got my arms in position and I'm still not, like I've got my, my grips, I've got the leg in position as well, but I don't feel like I can pull the leg up yet. Maybe it's holding my [04:07:50] leg off and I need to get my leg in position first.

[04:07:52] There's a few things we can do here. Okay. Use focus on. on pummeling, like I want to pummel [04:08:00] this leg in particular. It can be difficult to do from a range where he's controlling my leg. Sometimes I actually want to move my hips away. I step and I kind of [04:08:10] invert a little bit. I step on his stomach and I make more space.

[04:08:13] Now his arms are stretched. It's easier to pummel that. Okay. Sometimes I block the tricep, come under the near [04:08:20] armpit. So you can see that block his tricep. Can't follow as I tuck my foot under. And I take that, that armpit and get back into keigo. Or, so you, it is [04:08:30] okay to let go of the clasp you have on, of your hands together, okay?

[04:08:33] Occasionally, especially if he starts going towards the cross face, you might have to pummel underneath, hit your head back through, and [04:08:40] deal with that. In terms of the arm, this has got one arm. What I can do here, extend away, put my foot inside the [04:08:50] forearm, and kick outwards and up on the forearm, okay? So you cannot hold that grip.

[04:08:54] I'm going to get my foot inside, out on the forearm, and kick out, not towards him, he'll keep hold of [04:09:00] that, and control, but out and open, ok, he cannot keep that grip. And then I can start looking for my armpit position, or potentially to the opposite armpit too. [04:09:10] Ok, so again, we can go out, usually, usually to get this, you go wide, step away, make maximum distance so it's [04:09:20] stretched out.

[04:09:20] Pummel back. So they go high, under, kick. I can deal with that arm and I can start pummeling back where I want my legs. One thing I [04:09:30] want you to be careful of is pummeling high and over the top. So it's risky for things like a leg drag or counters if I start doing [04:09:40] this, okay, if I'm trying to step over like that.

[04:09:41] So really don't I don't want this wide open thing. Anytime I go, if I, if I'm going to bring my leg wide and open, I'm going to be blocking [04:09:50] to stop Ed from closing the gap. So if I wanted to come over the top with the pommel, I want to stop him from being able to get underneath the leg. Right. If you just go knee class and swing [04:10:00] high, this is bad.

[04:10:01] Okay. Even if I step on the hip, occasionally you'll see me do this where I'll like step on the hip to help pull the knee up, but this is still a little risky. He manages [04:10:10] to push my knee, my foot just past his hip, This is, I could be in danger. It's probably something I used to do more than I do now. Now, I find it much better, instead of going wide [04:10:20] like this, to look to pummel in towards the near side.

[04:10:23] And use that to off balance, or to get under this armpit. When you get under this armpit, there's no chance of [04:10:30] a leg drag, okay? Try to leg drag from that, that's impossible. I'm like blocking this arm, okay? He can't get underneath my leg. And he shouldn't actually really be able to pummel it through this [04:10:40] way either.

[04:10:40] It's a really solid grip, okay? But coming wide towards the hip, dangerous thing to do. Just one thing in terms of [04:10:50] pummeling our legs. You want to? often have one extended and the other one back. Okay, so I can pummel the leg best when my leg is back. So [04:11:00] if Ed's holding on to my leg, it's very hard to pummel with both feet extended like this.

[04:11:04] He can really control that and I can't pummel this leg. I want to have it back. Okay, now I can start to pummel, [04:11:10] right? If he starts to control this one, then I want to often want to kick with one and pull back with the other so I can pummel. So I've got like one, one distance [04:11:20] and one circle, okay? And often, if this is really dangerous from K guard, so like if he's really doing well, I'll often turn a little bit towards north [04:11:30] south to have better angle.

[04:11:30] Okay, so start pressuring him with your knee, and yeah, he's pushing my legs off. Staying side on can be dangerous. I'll often move myself a little more, my [04:11:40] head a little more up, and my hips up like this. So my head goes in, hips up, and I'll start pummeling from here, okay? This is often a better position for me.

[04:11:49] Notice pummeling the [04:11:50] armpit can often, let's go again, pummeling the armpit can help pummel one arm, one leg, the other leg, and then we can start to get our legs back in position. We'll have other options as [04:12:00] well, where if, if one's being blocked, we'll often come underneath. We can't come in front of the body.

[04:12:05] We're going to take our leg underneath and use that to scoot ourselves underneath our opponent. [04:12:10] Now[04:12:20]

[04:12:29] [04:12:30] that we've got the leg up onto our stomach, let's go again. We want to consider what our options are. One of the things that's going to determine what I go for from here, is [04:12:40] whether the knee is turned out or turned in, okay? If the knee is turned out like this, you can try to turn it back in, but if it is out, it's going to be very [04:12:50] difficult to enter something like a backside 50 50, okay?

[04:12:53] I can't chop over the, the side. I'm going to get jammed. In fact, put myself in a very bad position trying to do that. [04:13:00] When the knee is turned in, I have access to the back of the knee, and I can start to chop through and start to enter that position, right? So, generally, [04:13:10] if the knee is turned in, it starts to become a very good option to go for this.

[04:13:14] If it's turned out, I'm usually looking to either scoot myself underneath towards X guard, [04:13:20] or, and then potentially feed it across the body where I can then move my hips out and expose the back of the knee to the leg again. Or I can continue to. [04:13:30] attack. Okay. Or you might start to feed the leg across early from the Kegar position.

[04:13:35] You might start looking to the head across towards 70 30 here initially. [04:13:40] Okay. So again, knee turned out. Don't go for backside sit 50 50 straight away. Usually try to look to work underneath or feed the leg across your body.[04:13:50]

[04:13:54] So how do we turn the knee in? Now this is going to be really important. We're going to talk about the [04:14:00] knee. Sorry. How do we turn the knee in? Well, there's a grip that I use when I secure the knee on top of the [04:14:10] stomach and it's, it's useful for a few things actually. Okay, so I'm actually going to look to have pressure twisting Ed's knee [04:14:20] in like this.

[04:14:20] It's very similar actually to what we do from half guard. So if I've got half guard on Ed, I want to turn his hips away. I put pressure with my hips into the knee. [04:14:30] And I drag his foot. You watch this. When I do this, it turns. You can probably see it starts to turn his hips away and it stops it from being able to [04:14:40] turn towards me if I maintain pressure at the knee and pressure at the ankle.

[04:14:45] Very similar principle is going to be applied here. I [04:14:50] want my elbow pretty much at the ankle line. Obviously you might have to adjust if someone's really tall or short, but try to make sure you're getting the pressure to turn their knee. [04:15:00] So my elbow at the ankle line, and I want my hands close to the knee, like so, with my forearm dragging the knee in.

[04:15:09] Okay. [04:15:10] So I'm going to be able to create this tension here that rotates the knee, turn your knee out a bit. So I want to be putting pressure like this to turn it in. Notice, [04:15:20] it's kind of the inside of my forearm here, towards the elbow. Not over the elbow, so I haven't got the whole elbow on top. I want the elbow still on this side of the knee.[04:15:30]

[04:15:30] It's going to be like rolling back towards my hip. This is a strong action, like a rowing action. As my other elbow opens, like so, okay. [04:15:40] I want the hands here, we'll talk about this later, but I want the hands to be close to the knee. It's going to, obviously it helps with this particular twisting action, but it's also going to help stop [04:15:50] him running away.

[04:15:51] Now, so I've got this ability here to rotate, and this is going to be particularly accentuated if I can start to move my body underneath. [04:16:00] If I can move my body under, I can really rotate his knee. This is going to be great for getting his hands to the mat. So, not only does this grip expose [04:16:10] the knee, when I want to shoot over towards backside 50 50.

[04:16:13] But even if I go towards X guard, so let's say it stands up and I want to go into X guard, [04:16:20] I can get his hands to the mat using this grip. So I shoot under and I rotate his leg, forcing his hands to the mat. This is great for using X guard switch and [04:16:30] starting to get up. Okay. So that brings me to another really useful part of this grip, which is stopping your opponent running away.

[04:16:38] If I start [04:16:40] to put this pressure and it starts to run away. I'm really attached and I'll show you how this works. My shoulder is [04:16:50] pushing up and my hands are pulling back at the knee. So it's like I am putting a little, I'm like levering his knee up. So now wherever, wherever [04:17:00] he goes, he's going to pull my body with it.

[04:17:01] It's very hard to disengage from it. If we were to do this, for example, on the shoulder. Yeah, I don't have that same pressure. Straighten your [04:17:10] leg. I can't bend the knee. I don't have that same pressure. He can run and free the leg. Okay. So I want it actually on my elbow, not on my shoulder and [04:17:20] bending it down like this.

[04:17:21] Okay. Pulling back against the knee. Okay. Try to run it. It's going to pull me back. Okay. You can change that. It's actually very similar to a, [04:17:30] to the grip, how you would do an underhook in wrestling. So I can actually even keep this leg Get up on my right hand. And if Ed was to run away here, this pressure [04:17:40] here with my left arm will keep me attached to something like an X Card Swing.

[04:17:44] So you end up with a similar type of grip to how you would do an underhook in wrestling where you actually hook under their elbow, [04:17:50] above the shoulder, and you pull your elbow backwards. And if Ed tries to row his elbow back, it's kind of stuck, and it's hard to free that. Whereas when you [04:18:00] underhook too deep, if you reach too deep, you often allow them room to either drop their elbow back, or circle it, circle it at the top, okay?

[04:18:06] This shoulder forward, elbow back [04:18:10] and pushing down tends to be a really strong grip. So when you get this grip, a reminder you get your elbow at the ankle, forearm across the inside, connect your [04:18:20] hands high and close to the leg and try to connect your chest pretty much to the, to the side of the, or the inside of the shin.

[04:18:27] As you twist underneath, okay, so we're [04:18:30] pulling down like this, putting good pressure on the back of the knee, right? Shoulder forward, so he can't slip his foot up towards the top of my shoulder, okay? I don't want the foot coming up [04:18:40] here, where as you can see, you can pretty better see here, there's a bit more space for him.

[04:18:43] If you try to run here, he can move that, okay, compared to here. Try and run [04:18:50] now, and I'm really stuck to it. Also having the foot lower down, like kind of across your chest. allows you to twist. Okay, so if Ed's standing up, [04:19:00] I can really pivot through that and put pressure to make him turn. On the shoulder, you will not be able to do that if you want to stay up.

[04:19:09] I can't force [04:19:10] his knee in. Here, slipping the shoulder down to the elbow, getting my chest attached, and moving my hips under. I really can't.[04:19:20]

[04:19:23] So this grip was particularly good for him. rotating the knee in [04:19:30] and giving me a room to shoot my leg over. But, in actual fact, if I keep my hand at the knee when I want to chop over to something like a backside 50 50, my arm will actually get in the way of [04:19:40] my leg. Okay, so, although this is a good grip, when we're going for the backside 50 50 entry, we just want to understand how to stop them fleeing.

[04:19:48] Okay, because I'm going to have to take my [04:19:50] arm away a little bit and I'm expecting one potential reaction if Ed tries to run and free his knee and I don't want So, to stop that, [04:20:00] I'm really going to want to pinch tight, I want to close any gap here off onto that ankle, like so. And imagine, similar [04:20:10] thing with my shoulder coming forward over the foot, there's this big foot here that I want to make it a very small gap that it has to fit through.

[04:20:17] So if I start to lock in here and squeeze this tight, [04:20:20] pushing my chest forward and squeezing my arm back, if Ed tries to run now, he should really be stuck. He should have to. Pull me with him and it's not going to go into it. Okay, so if [04:20:30] you think about your forearm bone, try to make it so that jams behind the Achilles.

[04:20:34] I don't care if it's high, but make it so at some point, if he was to start to [04:20:40] free his foot, his heel is actually going to be a block and it's stuck. And also because my shoulder is forward, his foot or his toes will get stuck on my shoulder as well. Okay, [04:20:50] with my shoulder, if I had my shoulder back and I was squeezing like this, He can probably free that, but I don't think he can see that.

[04:20:55] So here I'm just using my chest. I want to have my, my shoulder [04:21:00] coming into it as well. That really closes off the gap. So, hand back at the, uh, forearm back at the Achilles, shoulder pushing into the, the top of the foot, close to the ankle, and [04:21:10] this should secure the grip. So as we actually, as we go from our kind of rotation, torque sort of action, as he starts to, as I start to chop over, [04:21:20] I'll change to really hugging tight with my shoulder pressure.

[04:21:28] We're just quickly talking [04:21:30] about where to place this foot, when it should go down and underneath, and when it should be pummeling in front. So, a lot of it will [04:21:40] have to do with your opponent's positioning. So for example, if Ed's turned his knee out, and I don't feel like I have good ability to turn it back in, then it usually means [04:21:50] he's facing.

[04:21:50] It's hard for him to do this, and also have this leg, this left leg out of the way. Whereas if he puts this knee in, he can [04:22:00] usually step that left leg back really far. I've got no ability to reach his leg now with my leg, but I've got ability to chop over the top. Whereas if he turns this [04:22:10] out, I can usually reach the inside leg.

[04:22:14] Generally, if the knee is out, this leg is actually looking to pummel underneath, [04:22:20] while my K guard leg is looking to make distance to stop Ed from closing the gap. As if I'm actually stepping. Sometimes this leg will step and push, [04:22:30] sometimes it will be more hooked and try to get my knee under it. So, then you've got the time where it's leg is turned in.

[04:22:38] From here, I'm [04:22:40] usually looking to access this. Let's see, forward and pressuring, yeah. So I'm usually looking to get like, either a hook on the far armpit, the near armpit, [04:22:50] and start to off balance. Or, if I get a good enough angle, I want to then shuttle. over the top to the back of the knee. Okay. And that's when we can start doing our full [04:23:00] backside 50 entry.

[04:23:07] In terms of this K guard leg, so obviously we can [04:23:10] push with that leg. I can actually step with my foot to push away. This is going to protect me against any sort of foot lock that Ed tries to do. He tries to foot lock this leg. Then I always can just push him [04:23:20] away. It's not going to work because of my K guard leg.

[04:23:22] I need to keep my knee, uh, below the line of his knee to save myself from being caught in some sort of leg lock from Ed. If he pulls that one up, [04:23:30] if my knee line comes too high, that's dangerous for me. So I'm always looking to keep my knee underneath. And actually that's going to help the knee coming underneath, which is the other main role, [04:23:40] is going to help bump Ed forward.

[04:23:41] So if he's pressuring in and I get my knee behind, you can see when I use this knee, it can bring his weight forward. Okay. So it's like I've, [04:23:50] step to the outside, outstep of my foot on his, on his stomach. And then pressuring out with that allows me to push in with my knee and start to tilt him [04:24:00] forward, getting his hands towards the mat.

[04:24:02] The other thing this leg might do is help with the pumping. So if Ed's kind of reaching out towards this, both hands maybe, sometimes you [04:24:10] can even step on the armpit here to aid you to get this back and then come back through. Okay. So I'm really wanting this space here Okay.[04:24:20]

[04:24:25] So from the kick out, you want to understand what your opponent's looking to do as well. So, [04:24:30] a person on top, there's a bunch of options they've got to try to defend. Most common is trying to push your legs off. So obviously just blocking the far leg [04:24:40] is very common. Often people will try to push the, just the near leg off.

[04:24:44] Some people will try to go both. Usually then they try to go towards. North south to try to go [04:24:50] past and push your feet away, if that can be effective. Some people will try to duck under the leg, hooking like this. Usually if they can get this, this is actually [04:25:00] quite a solid defense, particularly if they can come off under with their hand as they do this as well, so they can get their hand under your leg and reach under through here.[04:25:10]

[04:25:11] You'll get some people who just try to run away and you get care guard and they turn, they try to straighten their leg and. And free their knee.[04:25:20]

[04:25:22] And you get some people who try to counter with like leg drags and bare on boulders too. This can be really effective and we need to know how to deal with that. So [04:25:30] they might look to step their foot inside and start going for something like a, like a crab ride.[04:25:40]

[04:25:41] Or they might look to try to go under the leg, jam their knee, and start sitting in towards some sort of leg drag or potentially back into a crab [04:25:50] ride. You'll get some people who look to go for foot locks. So some people will try to attack this, this top leg and sit back in for some sort [04:26:00] of leg lock from there.

[04:26:03] And you get people who will, might even look to pull the knee leg up and try to attack that if you [04:26:10] are not having your leg in the right position. And lastly, some people will try to go under your legs the standard way, so instead of going with my left arm, some people might try to reach under and [04:26:20] pull your knee up to try to pass this way.

[04:26:23] Speaker 13: [04:26:30] [04:26:40] So we're now getting [04:26:50] into individual attacks and the main options for that. So remember the three main options are backside 50 50. We've got um X guard [04:27:00] or we've got the 70 30 position and then there's a few variants of those that we'll cover as well, right? So, we enter into the K guard position, connect our hands [04:27:10] together.

[04:27:10] I want to bring, get my knee down on the knee. Bring Ed's weight forward, off balance, and pull the knee up onto my stomach. From here, [04:27:20] I can start to enter the backside 50 50. So, I need to make sure that this knee is exposed. If his knee is turned up, as we talked about, we use that kind of [04:27:30] corkscrew action to try to expose the leg.

[04:27:33] Once I know the knee is exposed, I'm going to swing my leg over the top. Now, when you swing your [04:27:40] leg over to chop, I don't, I'm just going to show it like this, but it's I don't actually just swing my leg. It's very likely here that I lose Ed's knee if I do it this way. Okay. I [04:27:50] want to swing my, I want to get this leg deep.

[04:27:52] Okay. It's only going to go so deep from where I am. See if I can swing my hips up, I can thread [04:28:00] the leg a lot deeper. Okay. Almost to the point where I want to hook in front of the thigh here. So that helps kind of if Ed goes to run away, he's [04:28:10] kind of pulling back against him. A little bit. It keeps me a little more attached and just my leg is deeper.

[04:28:15] I've got my knee line deeper to force his knee to the ground, which is what I'm trying [04:28:20] to do now. I'm going to try and force his knee down to the ground. So I swing up with my hips, shoot and [04:28:30] feed as deep as I can here to force the knee to the ground. You can see my hand now changing more towards stopping him from free.

[04:28:38] This is the main way people will try [04:28:40] to defend. Okay. So I'm pinching nice and tight. If Ed goes to run, I'm stuck to the leg, right? Now it's really important that your K guard leg [04:28:50] will straighten and drop. So it goes from here to out straight, right? We'll look at that from the other side. So it's very important from here that [04:29:00] as I chop over the top, I keep my leg straight, right?

[04:29:06] Because then his knee lands in front of my leg. [04:29:10] I can bring that leg back to stop it from freeing his knee. This is like a block now. His knee is forced to the ground. He can't lift it off the [04:29:20] ground. And my bottom knee or thigh is in the way when he tries to kick out this way. This stuff. Okay. Very common that I see when I teach this, [04:29:30] people do their entry and they go like this.

[04:29:34] I didn't bring my legs straight. So of course his knee in front of my bottom lip. I don't have the knee [04:29:40] line now, I've lost everything. So make sure, as you kick over the top, that you straighten your left leg out. Force the knee to the ground, [04:29:50] and then chop back. Once you have that, you can then lock your feet as a triangle, and back heel tightly.

[04:29:57] Okay, I really peel both feet, I [04:30:00] said triangle, I'm like locked on my calf. Both feet peel back towards my, my hips, okay. Now I can almost lift the other leg and if Ed tries to run and free his knee, I should be quite [04:30:10] stuck to it. So I swing that leg over, feed it as deep as I can, force it to the ground, and then lock up this triangle.

[04:30:18] Once I'm here, if I'm [04:30:20] looking to get the, my main aim is usually to get the heel hook, even in, uh, if you were doing a rule set with no heel hooks, you lifted the foot up. and get an [04:30:30] overhook. You're in a good position to sweep. I could just get up with the overhook and come on top and I would score two points.

[04:30:37] Ed's doing something weird here. I could go for an ankle lock as well, [04:30:40] but usually, yeah, he's gonna fall back and I get top position. If I'm looking for the heel hook, what I'm looking to do is bend the knee by pushing [04:30:50] up. Okay. Once I've pushed the foot away from me, not across my body, I say this all the time, People pull across the body.

[04:30:57] This helps Ed. He wants to roll this way to [04:31:00] get out now He's I've just helped him get out. I want to give myself a little more time So I have the foot up and away. I'm pulling back with my top leg now. I Could I mean [04:31:10] I am trying with my feet But I want to pull my top leg back towards me now as I push the foot away now if it tries to run He can't, okay.

[04:31:18] So even if I [04:31:20] just keep this pressure, I can unlock my legs, just pulling my knee back towards me and levering his knee towards me. See that? As I push his foot away, it'll [04:31:30] bring his knee more towards me. Okay, that's the pressure I'm looking for as I pull my knee back, okay. And so as I pull my knee back, and I'm pushing the foot up.[04:31:40]

[04:31:40] So we've gone from three things that have stopped him running away. The first, Was, I've got my grip on the leg here. Okay, if he tries to run here, the grip on the leg [04:31:50] is keeping me engaged. I'm going to chop his knee to the ground, force it down. So make sure your knee hits the ground. And then I block with my bottom leg.

[04:31:59] Now, [04:32:00] without holding the leg, if he tries to run, that's difficult, especially if I can lock a triangle. Okay, keeping that knee down. Don't let it lift. As soon as it lifts, there's a gap to free through. Okay, so keep [04:32:10] that top leg forcing that down. Then As I started to push the leg up, I could even open my legs if I wanted.

[04:32:17] I mean, I don't see why you would, but I can [04:32:20] open my legs and, uh, and I'm pulling back. And that's the main thing that's keeping the leg from freeing. Okay. Now that we're here, I have access to attack the heel hook [04:32:30] from here. I'm going to keep the leg bent, keep it dangling, not across my body, but up. And I'm going to start to sit forward and curl.

[04:32:38] So I'm kind of 90 [04:32:40] degrees on to Ed. where I can get my elbow to connect to the toes, pull the toes back towards my ribs. And then I'm going to collect [04:32:50] the heel connecting my hands. It's not really a instructional how to finish your heel hooks. I'm not going to go into extreme amount of detail here. Once I've got this, [04:33:00] I will, my hips are usually a bit jammed up because I've curled in.

[04:33:02] So a hip bridge here won't be too good. I usually lead with my upper body here and then I can bring my hips second. Okay. And that would be the [04:33:10] submission. Just make sure, I will say, make sure with this one that you collect toes towards your ribs, not into your armpit. If you go [04:33:20] armpit here, you will get a very poor heel hook, and that would be likely to slip.

[04:33:24] I want to go toes towards the ribs, going behind my back almost to expose the heel [04:33:30] and catch. And I need to curl in. Okay, again, when I've taught this, I see people kind of front on trying to catch here, especially if I put that in my armpit. [04:33:40] This will be so, so weak at the heel hook, it's not going to work, okay?

[04:33:42] Bend it up, curl in, catch your toes, towards your ribs, connect your hands nice and tight, [04:33:50] look back, use your upper body first, and then bring your hips in second. So we enter the K guard, we get our legs in good position, where we can [04:34:00] pull our opponent towards, off balance, and pull the knee up onto the stomach here, with our elbows tight, like so.

[04:34:07] Good. If he's starting to turn his knee [04:34:10] out, I might use this torsion grip to start to force that knee back down so that I've exposed the back of the knee. I get my hips out, swing them up, [04:34:20] chop through and land, keeping good pressure on the leg so he can't run away using my arm pressure and my shoulder first.

[04:34:28] Knee goes to the ground, [04:34:30] my leg straightens, trap, triangle my legs, start to lift up, usually from the toes first. Then the ankle getting good pressure [04:34:40] curling in back towards me with my feet turning side on Elbow strikes the toes bring it towards your ribs Capture the heel lock your hands [04:34:50] Part your upper back first then bring your [04:35:00] hips[04:35:10] [04:35:20] [04:35:30] [04:35:40] [04:35:50] [04:36:00] [04:36:10] [04:36:20] [04:36:30] [04:36:40] [04:36:50] [04:37:00] [04:37:10] [04:37:20] [04:37:30] [04:37:40] [04:37:50] [04:38:00] [04:38:10]

[04:38:11] So what do you do if they free their knee? Um, this will happen regardless of how good your entries get, this will occasionally happen. So [04:38:20] when you chop the knee down, often you'll get it so it goes below the line of your bottom leg here. So he's free of his knee line. You got two [04:38:30] options here. You can try to try to salvage the heel hook or you can try to go to crab right.

[04:38:37] Okay. Both of them are great options, right? So [04:38:40] I can try to push the foot up like this. So support it, lift the foot with my hand. So my right hand lifts up this little just, and I'm [04:38:50] sorry. And I'm back here on his. knee with my right leg. So just slowing down his ability to fully disengage. Okay. So it's trying to run away and this is still keeping me [04:39:00] somewhat attached.

[04:39:01] Okay. And I want to get my elbow underneath. So it's almost like a frame from the ground. It's a solid structure that he can't put his foot down. If it's like this and his foot drops, [04:39:10] I'd lose it. As soon as his foot drops, he can just kick that right out. Okay. So I need to get that up and support it with my arm.

[04:39:17] And then cause that I'm supporting, I [04:39:20] can swim my own. Elbow, sorry, or tricep behind the leg. Okay. Sometimes all the way to the armpit. Usually tricep is enough. And I start facing away [04:39:30] and pushing myself up to bend the knee more. Okay. So the more, essentially the more I bend the knee and pull my knee towards my chest, I'm going to try and drag his [04:39:40] knee back, knee line back in.

[04:39:41] Okay. It's kind of hard with my hands, but if I get my tricep behind it, start getting up now. So now I've got a frame here. I can start [04:39:50] getting up. And start swimming back. You can see it's starting to lift his knee. Soon as the knee starts to lift, I kick my left leg back through as I [04:40:00] curl my right leg.

[04:40:01] You can see that drags the knee back in. So we go back a step, bring your knee again. Here, I kind of sit back, elbow strike back, [04:40:10] and kick my leg out. And often that will expose the heel in the same action. Okay, so by kind of going from tricep to heel, [04:40:20] Swim back to capture the heel in one motion. I don't want to do that while the knee's free, so I want to do that as I am kicking my leg through, collecting the [04:40:30] knee line as well as catching the heel, and we're ready to finish from there.

[04:40:34] Our other option is to go to crab right. So Ed frees his knee here. Okay, and [04:40:40] especially if you feel like you're really not going to get the heel back, I can turn on a hook in front of this leg. So I'm already like beginnings of a crab ride hook [04:40:50] with my left leg. I want to turn my knee out and retract my foot.

[04:40:53] Okay. Like so. Okay. Now my knees on the outside, I basically have like [04:41:00] crab ride would be without that foot where I've got the hips and the, and my two, so my hooks in and my knees out. Okay. I basically got that position, [04:41:10] but Ed's got his foot on the inside. So this is going to block me. When I try and connect to his hips, That's going to be difficult, or at least with both hands, you can't kick me away.[04:41:20]

[04:41:20] So what I will look to do from here, I hook, turn my knee out, I'm going to push the foot to the side. So I've got an [04:41:30] action to sit up. If it's in the middle, it's going to block me. I'm going to push it to the side, sit up and go for one hip nice and deep here. [04:41:40] If I can, I'm going to fall and roll this way.

[04:41:43] So I'm going to reach to the hips, roll. And kick my leg to free his leg. Now I have a crab rope. Okay, [04:41:50] so he's got his hook in. Like this, I can't get crab rope. If I take my left leg back, kick with my right, I can bring my knee underneath. [04:42:00] Okay, so even if you keep that tight, even if I kick and just swim my knee under, I get back into crab rope, and I can start looking towards the back.

[04:42:09] Or to [04:42:10] chase him up if he turns. You might even just use this to get on top. Or you can use it to get towards the back. Again, chop the knee down to the ground, it's free at his knee, I [04:42:20] hook, maybe even grab the leg, turn my knee out, and I want to make sure this foot goes to the side. Okay, two hooks here, reach to the hip, [04:42:30] reach to the far hip, pull.

[04:42:33] If he stays up, I can start retracting my left leg down and get up anyway. If [04:42:40] he keeps this, I'm going to try and pull him to the side. Bring it inside and take a crab break.[04:42:50] [04:43:00] [04:43:10] [04:43:20] [04:43:30] [04:43:40] [04:43:50] [04:44:00]

[04:44:08] Speaker 15: Common question I actually get [04:44:10] is how to deal with someone who backsteps when you enter backside 50 50. So as Kaya swings his leg over, you get the person to step back. Like this, [04:44:20] okay? So first on top, step back. Potentially, I get to capture Kaya's knee line and start to attack the heel hook on him.

[04:44:27] Speaker 13: Especially if he stays facing this way, it can actually end up sometimes [04:44:30] worse for him and I might even free my knee as we do that. So how do we deal with that? So the key for this is going to be to make sure my knee doesn't go deep [04:44:40] and follow his roll. So as I shoot through, I get to here. Kaya's going to backstep.

[04:44:45] I don't want to keep pushing this. Now, I don't want to keep this knee deep. [04:44:50] Now he's got my knee line. Potentially a counter attack on me. I haven't yet got his leg across my body too. So we just go back step over now. As soon as I recognize that he's back [04:45:00] stepping, I just want to take my knee back and put my foot in front of his stomach.

[04:45:04] So now as Kaya back steps, I'm going to follow him turning this way. But I'm just going to show it from [04:45:10] here. You can see with my foot in front of his stomach and my knee free, if Kaya tries to pull on my ankle, My leg through, it's actually very difficult. My foot on the stomach blocks that my foot still, still here.

[04:45:19] He can [04:45:20] drag that back in and force the counter. Okay, so if we just step over again, just watch, my knee will retract and I'll step in front of the stomach as he goes over. Okay. So again, [04:45:30] like this and I'll turn right. And now you can probably see here I've got his knee line. And if we turn around.[04:45:40]

[04:45:41] You'll see that my knee line is free. Okay, so we'll do that once more from this side now. So step over, you go back step, I do [04:45:50] this. Okay, my knee line's free, I've still got Kai's knee line caught, I can start looking to get.[04:46:00]

[04:46:05] So now let's talk about an opponent who's standing and they've still exposed [04:46:10] their knee. So we have a chance to try to enter backside 50 50. And actually If we can, we just knock them down, but I just want to show you spinning through, uh, to [04:46:20] either 50 50 or 70 30. Okay. So often if you can expose, like here, I can see the back of, um, Ed's knee is exposed.

[04:46:29] I can [04:46:30] try to chop him down. I might be able to, if I really want that backside 50 50, I can, I have to swing up cause I need my hips to come above the line of the knee. No point doing this. This is not going to work. [04:46:40] But if I can swing my hips up, Okay. and drop my weight, like with my calf and my knee. I can sometimes bring his knee to the mat.

[04:46:47] Speaker 14: Okay, but we're going to assume he stays up, [04:46:50] which will happen a lot. So it kind of stays tall and heavy on that leg. And I try to do the same thing and I'm stuck. Okay. So what I want to do here, when I chop the back of the [04:47:00] knee and I realize I can't, I want to actually spin right through. All right. I want to go hooking the fire leg, taking the head out the other side and coming through into.

[04:47:09] Speaker 13: [04:47:10] 70 30 or like a, an X guard with the leg on the opposite side. So what I'll look to do is take my [04:47:20] right foot to hook in front of the far leg, and that's going to help me spin further. I'm going to talk about my left leg in a moment, which you see has changed position, but I want to come up, [04:47:30] feed it. And I use that now, as soon as I hook the far leg, I can kind of use that to, to, to spin me through.

[04:47:38] Yeah. Cause I straighten that leg. to [04:47:40] help turn me around. So my, my leg here will hook the fire lip. I extend and I use it to spin myself through [04:47:50] like so, all right. Now what you'll notice is that I've dropped my aca leg from this side to the, to the [04:48:00] bottom knee or thigh to help turn me. Okay, so at a certain point here, this leg doesn't help me.

[04:48:07] spin anymore. Okay. It doesn't help me get [04:48:10] extra range with the spin. So I might not be able to reach the far leg, but if I drop it here, it helps. I can kind of lift my hips and rotate [04:48:20] myself further through. I straighten my left leg against his thigh and I can feed that through. But I wouldn't be able to do it here.

[04:48:27] Okay. So I dropped my K guard leg [04:48:30] to the knee lift and thread. And now I've got my right leg. Okay. This is excellent. My head will be in the way because my head's right next to his [04:48:40] ankle and it's going to get jammed. I actually have to move, I'm just while I'm disengaged just so you can kind of see because my legs would be in the way, but I want to actually move my head [04:48:50] away and spin it out and underhook this leg with my hand.

[04:48:54] So I'm going to end up with an underhook on this ankle. So again, we [04:49:00] start with our head here. I want to push my head away first And then underhook as I face him. So when you see that, [04:49:10] from the K guard, I lift the hips up, and I can use this to help me, I feed through, I need to take my head away, so I actually grab the ankle, [04:49:20] both hands, grab the ankle, to move my hip, away and out, and then I underhook the leg, to keep stability.

[04:49:27] This is not like, Get a hold for very [04:49:30] long. If he tries to run, I won't be able to keep that. But when I underhook, I can.[04:49:40]

[04:49:40] So I'm here, I grab the ankle, move my head out, and I underhook. Try and run now. I usually put one a bit higher and one around the ankle. I'll [04:49:50] have my right foot is in front of the hip. Then I put my left foot in front, knee behind, and lock up. an X guard here. Okay, so [04:50:00] making sure this doesn't slide through.

[04:50:02] So you've always got something blocking him from stepping around. Okay, he wants to step around, this leg blocks, this leg blocks, and then I hook, [04:50:10] and I've got this, uh, basically X guard with the leg on the opposite side, which is essentially the 70 30 position, which I can settle in and continue to look for heel hooks and [04:50:20] attacks from here.[04:50:30] [04:50:40] [04:50:50] [04:51:00] [04:51:10]

[04:51:13] Alright, so now dealing with when we've got a standing opponent and the knee is not [04:51:20] exposed or maybe we just want to get to X guard anyway. So, or, or this can be good to go for if I just like, it's just constantly blocking [04:51:30] this outside leg, maybe with both hands, and it's very difficult to. Find an avenue to chop over the top, but usually you can start to go underneath.

[04:51:38] Okay. So either one, maybe it's [04:51:40] turned to the out or maybe, uh, this, or maybe he's kind of stepped forward with that leg and it's a very easy entry into X guard. Okay. So we've got the knee [04:51:50] somewhat turned out. One thing which we'll deal with in a moment, but if he drops down very low, some people almost like sit down, put your left knee to the ground and kind of sit back even a little.

[04:51:59] Yeah. [04:52:00] Some people It's going to be very hard to get X guard because I can't get underneath. with my hips very well in a scenario like that. We'll talk about passing the leg across to 70 30 when that's the case. But in [04:52:10] this scenario, we're going towards X guard. So it's really important when I go to X guard that I want to face towards the camera.

[04:52:18] Right now with K [04:52:20] guard, I'm slightly facing. My left and I end up facing my right. Okay, and I need so what I need and my hips are actually in front of It's hips. I'm kind of [04:52:30] here and he's over here I want to be underneath on the far side with him on this side of me. Okay, so I Want to make sure when I scoot under [04:52:40] that I actually get to here Okay So now I'm facing my right and it's hips are kind of in front of me my hips are now on this side This is really good position [04:52:50] If you go to X guard, and you're still, so if I'm out here, and I make an X with my legs, it's actually quite likely that Ed pushes this off.

[04:52:59] Yeah, I just push, [04:53:00] yeah, top leg down, yeah. And now I've actually got bad, I'm in a retention mode here, potentially bad positioning, because both my legs are out of play. Alright, [04:53:10] so, you need to make sure when you do this, that you're going to get your hips in the right position. My knee here needs to drop [04:53:20] behind his hips.

[04:53:23] I'm really wanting my, my knee as I enter to get underneath [04:53:30] so that I can wedge, I'm sorry, not wedge, not the right word, but I can kind of lever using this knee and my foot to force him down to the ground. And I obviously [04:53:40] want that torsion grip at the elbow here to assist with that and kind of Rotate his knee this way.

[04:53:49] Okay, the [04:53:50] more I do this, the more it forces him down to the ground. In combination with my knee bumping him forward. Alright, so again, on the shoulder, you're gonna struggle to [04:54:00] actually get, I might get to here, but there's a good chance Ed moves backwards. Now I've locked my legs, moved backwards, and he starts to step off.

[04:54:07] Okay, whereas if I enter with this grip, [04:54:10] Correctly, then he tries to move backwards here. It's very difficult to do. I can lever him down towards the ground. So let's talk about scooting underneath. I [04:54:20] want to, I want to turn in towards him first. This is counterintuitive because I eventually want to face my right, but I actually have to turn in to get a good back heel.

[04:54:29] Okay, [04:54:30] I want to hook his calf, not his knee, not his thigh. Okay, this will move me so much now that the calf will really move my hips. Okay, so my right leg, I'm just going to. I'll take my left leg [04:54:40] out just to show you guys, my right leg here, I'll chop here, and it's gonna, I'm gonna use that back heel to pull me all the way through to face this way.

[04:54:49] Okay, so that back [04:54:50] heel does most of the action. One thing I see a lot, which is obviously intuitive but wrong, is to face the, like, cause I want to face the right, I see people facing the [04:55:00] roof, and they hook kinda like this. So here, I hook like upwards, as opposed to turning in, and back heel. Back heel is strong.

[04:55:08] This is weak. If I do this [04:55:10] and I try to get under, I won't get nearly as far. Okay. If Ed wants to keep moving backwards and I do this, I'll probably get stuck. He pushes my legs off and he gets out. Okay. I [04:55:20] want to turn in, chop, try, try to move backwards now, okay. See that? So I, I curl and turn. Okay. It's a much [04:55:30] bigger hip motion by back heeling at his calf as opposed to being more.

[04:55:37] vertical with my leg like this. Okay. So again, [04:55:40] not here, but here. So it's often that I actually will move my hips away so that I can move my hips away a little [04:55:50] so I can get a good ankle to back heel at the calf. And then as you're scooting under, you flare your leg out. So I scoot under and this hook now is pushing out.

[04:55:59] It's [04:56:00] another thing that it's hooking and stopping it moving backwards. So I've got three things that are going to assist me here. the ground. I'm blocking his leg. I've got my [04:56:10] knee underneath that I'm leveraged with my foot pressuring in and my knee pressuring this way. And I've got that torsion grip. I [04:56:20] extend with my left leg to push his weight away from me.

[04:56:23] As I rotate, and it should get his hands to the mat. Okay, once his hands are in the mat, we [04:56:30] have X guard, or you can keep your grips, start getting up. Or, if you want, look, I've exposed, once his hands have hit the mat, I've exposed the back of his knee. If I want, [04:56:40] I can step on his body again, I take my right leg out, step, move my hips back out again, and I can chop through to backside 50 50, [04:56:50] and look for the finish.

[04:56:52] That's one thing I want to say about this leg. Don't like hover it down here. This is not good. It can start to really control the leg. So I'm usually [04:57:00] like trying to punnel, I move away and it's quite quick that I catch the calf here. I don't want to just hover it here looking to get this grip. This is going to be a pain in the butt.

[04:57:08] a bad outcome. All right. [04:57:10] One other thing with this, if Ed steps, if he steps forward to here, then you don't have to do the calf thing. You can just hook. Basically [04:57:20] he's brought his hips to this side of me. I can just hook here. I don't need to do that back heel. But if he's kind of keeping away, which is more common, that's when I have to use this back heel to [04:57:30] shoot myself.

[04:57:30] I'm done and rotating down. We want to sweep from the X guard. So I'm gonna get his hands down to the [04:57:40] mat. Then, I want to keep a good grip, like this, so shoulder forward, grip on the back of the calf, so that when he tries to run away, he's stuck, I start to get up. So I can [04:57:50] kick, retract. Now just focus on pushing the knee downwards, okay?

[04:57:54] If I push downwards, my shoulder lever works really well. So if you're trying to run away, that's difficult. [04:58:00] As I start to get up. Once you get up here, it is really let start to Renu leg. I can connect my hands and I can pull them back down or Renu leg [04:58:10] again. With this grip, I start, like I get up or with this grip, I will pull to the side, feet underneath the, the [04:58:20] leg or the hip and take the hip.

[04:58:22] Okay, so if you can get the enough, you take the hip, but usually it's, it's from here, leg hip. [04:58:30] And we're onto the hips, ready to take the back or, or pull them down to the mat. So I get to K guard, I want to get underneath, or I want to chop over the top and he's turned his knee out, [04:58:40] maybe stepping tall, maybe his legs available.

[04:58:43] I want to get into X guard instead now and then potentially get, I want to get his hands to the mat regardless for X guard and that could let me go [04:58:50] back to backside 50 50 or let me try to get up for a sweep. So I'm going to get my torsion grip, make sure his ankle is at my elbow. Put my [04:59:00] forearm on the outside of the knee with my elbow pointed in front.

[04:59:03] I'm going to move my hips away for a moment, hook behind the calf. If he's holding my leg, I might have been trying to chop [04:59:10] over. I move my hips away, I come underneath. Top of the calf with my heel, I scoot under, flare my leg out. Get my knee behind his hamstring here. [04:59:20] And I rotate my leg to face out. From here, I'm torsioning, lifting my shoulder up, pressuring the knee down.

[04:59:28] I've turned him in, I [04:59:30] can look to get up with X guard. Or, step out and move my hips again. Backside 50 50. Heel.[04:59:40] [04:59:50] [05:00:00] [05:00:10] [05:00:20] [05:00:30] [05:00:40] [05:00:50] [05:01:00] [05:01:10] [05:01:20] [05:01:30] [05:01:40] [05:01:50]

[05:01:58] Alright, we're now working from a scenario where Ed's [05:02:00] dropped his knee, usually, especially when he's sitting low. If he sits, he's kind of tall here, I often still can, like, look to scoot my hips under towards X guard here. [05:02:10] Um, but yeah, he's often sitting low and I, now there's no way I get under towards X guard.

[05:02:15] Okay. So. In a scenario like this, I'm going to try to [05:02:20] support the knee with my hook here by pointing my knee up. Okay, so now it's hard for Ed to retract his leg and it works as kind of a hook, right? [05:02:30] Or if you can pop up a little bit, sometimes there'll be a little push just to keep distance as well. So you can see my, my leg kind of like does this.

[05:02:37] I push my knee in as I step [05:02:40] on his, uh, on his thigh or stomach with my leg. And I'm going to look to pass the leg So, because of this [05:02:50] scenario, Ed can turn his knee out. There's no way I'm going to chop over to backside 50 50. And I also don't have enough space to get underneath towards X Guy. So [05:03:00] the only really good solution here is to look to pass the leg across.

[05:03:03] So first, support the leg with your knee, so you can't retract it this way. From there, usually I want to bring [05:03:10] the leg high. So I want to actually stretch his leg, higher up because the biggest risk when you pass the leg is that they actually free the whole leg. So I want to try [05:03:20] to first bring that leg high.

[05:03:22] My knee coming behind can help pull it in. So kind of pulling my knee towards me as I flare and my hand [05:03:30] under hooking the leg will shuck it up towards my shoulder. The safest way is to reach behind your head, lift and feed it across [05:03:40] this way. You can see how high his leg is. stays relative to my body. So I want to get an overhook.

[05:03:45] Once I have the overhook, I know he's not running away. Okay. But it is [05:03:50] okay. Sometimes here, especially if you get a good hook to pass it here too, because like I can get a grip like this, my legs hooking, I'm hooking. If Ed tries to run away here, [05:04:00] it's not so easy. Once I get my elbows locked by my side, I tend to follow him with his away and my elbows will keep me attached, elbows [05:04:10] open.

[05:04:10] I probably don't want his foot to come. Yeah. So from here we've got K guard so I can stretch a little bit of my knee. They get my knee in position. [05:04:20] Ideally reach with my hand behind, feed it across. Oh, or from here it could [05:04:30] be hands faded across. Oh, now often when we get out, We want to sit up into it, especially if Ed's trying to, like, if Ed's running away a little bit.

[05:04:39] Okay, I might [05:04:40] have almost lost it. I want to get my hook, which slows him down from pulling his leg away. I need to turn, lift, and sit up in to take that, that overhook. Okay, so [05:04:50] often it is like that, where we have to go like this, as opposed to, like, lying down where I want to be able to get it. Okay, so, again.

[05:04:58] Okay, go. Start to pass [05:05:00] the leg. If we're losing it a little bit, I might sit up. Okay. Take my own. All right, and now I've got 70 30. I'm going to have a whole section on what to do from here. An [05:05:10] obvious thing from here is we can go back to the backside 50 50. All right, so to do that, I'm going to move my hips out to the side, like so, to expose [05:05:20] the back of the knee to me.

[05:05:20] I can really see the back of the knee now. All right, so we'll go this through this part in detail. So to, to get to the backside 50 50 from here, there's a few things [05:05:30] I'm going to need to do. I want the foot high in my armpit. The lower this is down, the more likely he frees his knee and the harder it is to actually chop [05:05:40] my leg off.

[05:05:40] You see my hip gets kind of blocked. I can't roll my hip back to swing my leg over. If I can bring the foot up to my armpit here, quite high [05:05:50] like this, my hips are free to lift and shoot behind. Um, so to do that, I'm going to be on my side. [05:06:00] Curl my head in and lift my elbow up with my wrist coming high. I can lock that nice and high in my armpit.

[05:06:06] So again, when we feed it across, it's going to be low. [05:06:10] I turn, extend. I want my hips, my head in and hips out. So I use this hook to extend out. Now I've got good access, [05:06:20] all right. So I don't want to just chop my leg because this will get stuck again. I want my hips coming over, all right. So I'm going to bring my hips.

[05:06:29] Right [05:06:30] up and over to thread through. It can be a great idea at a certain point to step on their leg to keep them stretched out. [05:06:40] And notice the back of Ed's heel is hooked by my armpit and tricep. So if he tries to run here, he's really stuck. If I can stretch his leg out pushing [05:06:50] and pulling, roll my hips up feed through forward.

[05:06:55] and go deep here. And then as I extend my leg [05:07:00] through, it will start to push the heel to be exposed. Okay, so if you look at this, I could, I'd have to reach back very far. This would be a bad heel hook. [05:07:10] When I kick my leg, it starts to bring the heel where I want it to the finish. Okay, often this happens like [05:07:20] during the roll.

[05:07:21] Okay, so here I shoot up, I thread, and it bends the knee, I want to bend his [05:07:30] knee, thread it through and expose the heel in one action. If he's pressuring it to me a bit, it's sometimes a bit more of an invert, okay? So sometimes it's more like this, [05:07:40] okay? Like an invert. and capture the heel. [05:07:50] So a[05:08:00] [05:08:10] [05:08:20] [05:08:30] [05:08:40] [05:08:50] [05:09:00] [05:09:10] [05:09:20] [05:09:30] [05:09:40]

[05:09:45] summary of our main offensive options before we cover some of the less common [05:09:50] options from here and then into some retention, okay. So we get into to K guard, we want to elevate, if we need to we step on the hip, we elevate [05:10:00] the the knee and get it onto our stomach, or at least up to here. Okay. From here, if the back of the knee is exposed and we want to look [05:10:10] towards leg locks, then we're going to look to get our hips out, swing up, capture the ankle, shoot through, force the knee down to the ground, [05:10:20] lock our feet together by kicking our legs straight and locking our feet, lift up, curl in, capture the heel.

[05:10:28] If Ed's knee is [05:10:30] turned out and he's dropped low, then we're usually going to look to pass the leg across to the other side into the 70 30 position. From here, we can look [05:10:40] to spin, capture the heel, and go for backside 50 50. Or there's a bunch of other options from 70 30 to try to get up and attack, [05:10:50] or we'll cover that in the 70 30 section.

[05:10:53] If Ed's, the back of Ed's knee is not available and there's room underneath, whether he's, if he's kneeling [05:11:00] high or if he's standing up, or if I can't chop over towards the back, or if I just like trying to get to X guard and I want to turn my hips away, face in, hook the back of [05:11:10] the calf, scoot underneath, and then rotate his knee in, bumping him forward with my knee to modified X, sorry, into, into X guard, where I can push away [05:11:20] to get up to the X guard I'll turn that back into a backside 50 50 entry to continue to attack the heel hook.[05:11:30]

[05:11:33] Just a quick summary of our upper body attacks that we can go for from Kega. So, if we [05:11:40] already covered Ed praying against my leg with his left hand, I can swing, capture the elbow, and shoot up for the armbar. However, if he cross [05:11:50] faces, I do have the option of coming back out and attaching the elbow.

[05:11:55] towards this prone arm bar, or the Choi bar, or Ged bar as we call it. [05:12:00] And, one we haven't covered is the, um, the triangle, okay, which is an option. Right, so, if Ed [05:12:10] happens to leave this leg free when I get to K, so this arm free as I go to K guard, so maybe he's reaching towards the head. And he manages to leave this [05:12:20] elbow out while this arm, maybe he's reached under the leg with the arm or it's just out of the way.

[05:12:24] Maybe you're pummeling and he took it out of the way for a moment. We can grip onto the tricep here, [05:12:30] shoot our hips up, collect the head, and I want to swivel using my K guard leg, this leg here, I want to take my hips out. I don't really want to [05:12:40] lock a triangle here. It's unlikely, and it's okay, but it's going to be a lot of work to finish.

[05:12:45] I would really like it to. Capture his head with my right knee, squibble off this [05:12:50] leg, out onto my other hip. So I want to shoot from from gripping the elbow for maximum leverage to pull his elbow open. And [05:13:00] my knee coming over the head to try to stop him posturing up. So if Ed tries to posture up that's difficult.

[05:13:06] And then I use my left leg to take his elbow away, [05:13:10] move my hips out onto my right side and my hips out to the left. At the same time, that same action starts to chop my leg across the neck, where I can [05:13:20] start to attack the triangle, okay? So, again, we get to K guard, maybe Ed reaches for a crossface, and he's, yeah, he's done something like this, so he's reached under the [05:13:30] leg on my frame for a moment, reach, and capture the back of the head and the tricep, curl away, change the angle, and start [05:13:40] to lock up the triangle.[05:13:50] [05:14:00] [05:14:10] [05:14:20]

[05:14:26] So a less common option, but if you really like close guard and [05:14:30] some of the attacks that can come from this, you can try this particular entry. We're going to go from, from K guard into close guard, but you kind of get a really good [05:14:40] angle on your close guard. So I'm just going to end up outside the leg.

[05:14:43] So I'll show you where we can end up. I'm going to bring my leg high and feed my leg through, change my head and my hand [05:14:50] and shoot my hips up. So close guard, but out to the side like this. I usually don't look for this, but sometimes it's very heavy on this leg and I'm kind [05:15:00] of jammed up out on this side.

[05:15:02] And if I can bring my foot high, this creates space to shoot my other leg back through again. Okay, so you see usually [05:15:10] my K guard legs, the one that's in front and this other one's kind of framing and making distance. In this scenario, I'm gonna bring my K Guard leg up to the armpit and shoot the other leg through.[05:15:20]

[05:15:20] Like so, okay. I keep, I've now made like a body X, okay. I've got an X on Ed's body, all right. I just need to take my head from outside to inside. So I keep my [05:15:30] grip locked and I take my head out like so, and I change my arms so that my left arm going deep, it's going to be my right arm going deep. [05:15:40] Okay. Once I've got that, I start shooting my hips up.

[05:15:43] So you can see I've got that X on the body. I want to shoot my hips up. And unwind, and I lock into [05:15:50] closed guard here. Right. Now, I've got a few options from here. It's hard for Ed to, to square up to me. If he tries to square up to me, I've got this leg, [05:16:00] so I can start to use it to attack an armbar, or take him over.

[05:16:06] Right. So once I've got this leg, [05:16:10] I've taken away Ed's ability to base on this side with the leg. So if I start to pendulum him out this way, he's either going to have to post with the arm or get swept. So usually [05:16:20] from here, if I can swing to a high guard, start to kick him over, he either gets swept, so if you don't post, he gets swept over, [05:16:30] or he posts with his arm.

[05:16:31] When he posts with his arm, I can trap the tricep. Swing my leg over the top, and start to attack a straight arm bow. [05:16:40] Otherwise, occasionally, when you go for that, it might free his arm, and this gives you a chance to look to take the back from here. [05:16:50] So we get to K guard, it's maybe heavy on this side, I bring my foot up, shoot my other leg through to the hip, keeping this gap open, take [05:17:00] my head out, change hands, so the other arm's deep, shoot my arms up, through.

[05:17:05] into the closed guard. From here, I try to pendulum sweep. [05:17:10] If I take him over, that's good. If he posts, capture the elbow. And if he frees his elbow, I push the arm to the inside [05:17:20] and start trying to take him back.[05:17:30] [05:17:40] [05:17:50] [05:18:00] [05:18:10] [05:18:20]

[05:18:23] Speaker 15: Now talking about shallow K guard. So, uh, I'll see in the Della Hila section, we'll talk a bit more about the entry, but we managed to [05:18:30] pummel the underhook, push it away, drop it and knee down. Uh, what are our attacks from here? Now, there's basically two attacks you can go for. [05:18:40] Alright, from here, I can either chop behind the leg, and bring Misha down, into backside 50 50.

[05:18:47] Speaker 13: Or, I can move up, [05:18:50] into a regular K guard, and start to attack from there. Okay, so, it's actually very similar to the, you know, to the [05:19:00] standard K guard in terms of, in terms of your options. Alright, so, Basically, when you get this shallow K guard position, if Mish doesn't [05:19:10] block this leg, I probably should look to move it up towards the hip.

[05:19:14] It's a bit of a better control where I can jam my knee underneath. It's a tighter control than having my, [05:19:20] my foot quite shallow like this. Okay. Um, it's also a little easier to stop him running away here. There's a bigger, like in shallow K guard, it's more likely to [05:19:30] freeze. And so, so be ready. with your grip in particular for this to get that shoulder forward and pull the leg to your chest.

[05:19:38] So if Mish does go to run, I want to [05:19:40] pull that down very quickly and close that gap to my chest. That's the most common way people will get out of this. So, all the [05:19:50] pummeling and everything that we covered in K Guard will be present from here as well. If Mish is fighting this leg, then I want to be pummeling, looking for the armpit.

[05:19:59] and bring it out. [05:20:00] Okay, so generally if he goes two hands on the far leg, we can bring our foot back up here, but maybe I'll go to the armpit to assist, and then come back into a regular style [05:20:10] Kegel, where I'm at the hip. If he's pushing both legs, like so, then that's when we're gonna have to pummel again, so I'm [05:20:20] bringing my foot inside, I might stretch one, kick the other one away, so that's a pummel, change back, and then we're It's tend to invert a little bit more just so I can get [05:20:30] better angle to step behind the foot or to swing my leg back, uh, inverting, getting more room for my legs to start to pummel back in front.[05:20:40]

[05:20:40] For the backside 50 50, I'm looking to rotate and expose the back of Misha's leg here so that I can swing my hips up. Really important my hips [05:20:50] come up with this so you don't, you don't chop here. You really need a good swing to capture this. So make sure you win your pummeling battles first. Okay, we talked about not getting [05:21:00] counted.

[05:21:00] If I do a big wide swing when he's winning the control of my leg, this is no good. I'm gonna want to first pummel in. Okay, now, or even from shallow [05:21:10] kegger, now, once I've won this, I know that I'm immediately going behind the leg, I get a chance to [05:21:20] attack the backside 50 [05:21:30] [05:21:40] [05:21:50] [05:22:00] [05:22:10] [05:22:20] [05:22:30] [05:22:40] [05:22:50] [05:23:00] [05:23:10] [05:23:20] [05:23:30] [05:23:40] [05:23:50] [05:24:00] 50.

[05:24:04] Speaker 16: [05:24:10] [05:24:20] So now we're going through some troubleshooting. First one is Ed controls the far leg. Some of this we've covered. I want to cover one thing we haven't covered so far. So maybe he goes two on one for [05:24:30] that leg. For example, so we talked about pummeling, so I can use my hand to block. I can kick away with my inside leg to help me pummel.

[05:24:38] So I can pummel my foot [05:24:40] inside once his hand is stretched. Um, I can sometimes even step on the armpit to get behind the armpit here and pummel that leg well. [05:24:50] If I don't circle over, like if he's holding that leg, I don't really want to try to circle over the top. This exposes too much. So I really want to win this pummel first [05:25:00] before I start thinking about chopping to backside 50 50.

[05:25:04] But another option is to go underneath towards X guard. So we covered how to [05:25:10] shoot that underneath and come under towards X guard.[05:25:20]

[05:25:25] There is one way that Ed might do this, which makes this very [05:25:30] difficult. Okay, so he might stand tall. Let me just turn a little bit. He might stand tall, hold my far leg. Yeah, both hands. And he puts his feet together. [05:25:40] Good. There we go. Okay. So now look, there's no way I'm going to get to, um, to X guard. How can I hook that leg?

[05:25:49] Okay. When you're stepping [05:25:50] out, you go back. Okay. Yeah. I can shoot underneath and get here. And when he puts his feet together, I can't do that. Right. So usually here, what I do is I reach my [05:26:00] right hand to the top of the knee, left hand towards the far knee, hooked like this. Okay. So I actually end up wanting to control both legs.

[05:26:08] So I've gone from my [05:26:10] torsion sort of grip, Back of the knee and here. Okay, from here I'm going to pummel still with my right leg. So I want to get my right leg inside still even if it's just to here [05:26:20] and I want to shoot my legs up and over but bring my hips up high. Okay, like so. [05:26:30] So I really want to do this above the knee line.

[05:26:32] Okay, there's no point Chop in here. Here actually I can give Ed like a crab right entry. His knees are free. He can start to attack me. [05:26:40] So I want to make sure when I shoot up that I capture his knee line. Okay. And I chop across behind. Like a 50 50 but it's with both legs. [05:26:50] Here I can start to attack the heel.

[05:26:51] So, I've got Kago. Ed stands with his feet together. Locks the leg. I change to here and here. I pummel [05:27:00] inside. Bring my leg up. Hi, I want to get my hips above the line of his knee and chop behind his leg. Okay, let's get back. Try and stand. If he tries to keep his [05:27:10] base, if he tries to keep his base, he probably can if I do this.

[05:27:14] But when I bring my hips up and chop behind, I'm going to take him over.[05:27:20]

[05:27:23] Obviously when we knock them down, we've got great access to attack a heel. I've got K guard, [05:27:30] 8 steps together. I grip the leg, come underneath, I pummel my leg in, come up nice and high, bring my hips up, and circle through. [05:27:40] And then look to catch the heel from there.[05:27:50] [05:28:00]

[05:28:00] Alright, what do we do if Ed pushes both feet away like this? This is bad, he's starting to get towards north south. So first off, don't let that happen. [05:28:10] So, if he's up tall like this, he's in. And both my legs are up. This is quite easy for him to just bring his hip. Like his, his hip coming forward like that is making my [05:28:20] K guard, the knee leg, quite hard to hold.

[05:28:22] Okay, so it's easy for him to push that off. Okay, so if he's tall like that, my other leg is going to be low. I'm much more likely to be shooting underneath towards an [05:28:30] X guard than, than trying to battle for upper body control. His upper body is too far away. Okay, so just keep your leg back. And it's going to be much harder now for Ed if he wants to control both legs and clear them.

[05:28:39] I can be [05:28:40] using like This kind of push pull. One's always coming back and kicking, like so, and one's retracting so that he can never control both. But if he does do that, [05:28:50] he's usually looking to go knee on belly. I want to keep my legs tight and use his momentum to throw his weight forward with, we'll call it the slam dunk.

[05:28:58] Like I'm doing a [05:29:00] slam dunk with my legs. My arms. Okay, so Ed pushes me forward, and I'm taken forward as I sit up. Okay, I just throw, use that momentum, throw the [05:29:10] leg down, and get up on my hand. Once I'm up on my hand, I can't be pushed back down because of this front. Okay, once more. Obviously, pummel, don't extend both legs at once, but if he does manage to [05:29:20] push them both off, throw forward, and get up on your arm.

[05:29:23] And you can actually often get a sweep from here, or at least come up, or go back towards the backside.[05:29:30] [05:29:40] [05:29:50]

[05:29:52] If Ed tries to push the knee leg, the K guard leg off, I don't, obviously don't want that to happen. Drop in a little bit more because usually [05:30:00] people are kind of pressuring him when they do this. Okay, so first off, use your secondary leg, like my right leg, to try and get under that armpit. Now it's very hard for him to re [05:30:10] control my leg.

[05:30:10] If I just retract my knee, I can circle back into the hip. And now it's harder for him to get at because I've got my right leg in position. Okay. Now, if he [05:30:20] totally commits to that, then it means, look at this space he's giving me here. He's really going to give me the back of his knee if he really wants to get rid of that.

[05:30:27] I can often just chop over the back and start going towards [05:30:30] backside, 50 50, or, you know, even to, to grab right at the corner and start attacking the back more. While he's clearing that, often it's just like, retract [05:30:40] down and come back up. It seems to be like, sliding back up the line of the thigh, it's hard for him to, you know, to push off as opposed to like leaving it out in the open here but using my hand [05:30:50] like so your leg behind the armpit to pull your leg back as well and as he's over committing like he has now he's giving me this knee I can drop behind and catch that knee [05:31:00] if you go back it is not dropping that knee anymore up here it's probably going to be a lot easier for me to deal with this he's trying to push the foot off here I can just [05:31:10] be using constantly pummeling here all right it's hard for him to lose control of that For any serious amount of time and obviously while I'm doing that I'm trying to chop [05:31:20] or come underneath to get my attack going

[05:31:27] So Ed might try to turn and run when you get to [05:31:30] Kega Okay, so here I need to be ready to close this gap between my hands and my chest as quick as possible All right, so I also will probably put my foot [05:31:40] Underneath or all over the top. I'm gonna do something with my right leg. It's not gonna be floating.

[05:31:44] Okay, so So if it goes to turn and run here, I can drop that down. If I can jam that knee down, [05:31:50] I've now got a chance to shoot over the top towards here. Or, again, if it goes to turn and run, I can shoot my foot underneath and I can often turn it in towards [05:32:00] the, the hand towards the mat in the, in the X guard.

[05:32:02] Okay. So just be ready for that. If we go back. I'm ready as I enter, then a lot of people will turn and run, and if I leave [05:32:10] this gap, I go, kick, free, ah, yep, I'll do it, okay? So I don't want to leave that gap, okay? As he goes to run, I want to [05:32:20] drop that down, pull the hands down towards the chest tightly, and there's a long way for him to slide, all the way at least to the foot here, where I can continue to attack.[05:32:30]

[05:32:34] If air does drop, more like, uh, some people drop backwards, drop to your hip, [05:32:40] and start to scoot away. If you do lose the leg, like this, often I push the foot to the inside, and we go [05:32:50] back to our normal, okay? So like, once you're at a point where you no longer feel like you're gonna be able to drag the leg in, I can't even overhook, then I start trying to push the foot between my legs, I keep [05:33:00] my hook.

[05:33:01] And I can start swinging my leg over

[05:33:07] Speaker 17: to attack.[05:33:10] [05:33:20] [05:33:30]

[05:33:32] Speaker 16: Sometimes people will underhook your leg and try to lift your leg up, like so. Okay, I don't want that to happen. So, [05:33:40] one of the, because he can start to pass obviously if he does that. So, if we go back, I want to keep my knee down and I'm thinking, okay, this should be way too hard to get [05:33:50] under. All right, good for now.

[05:33:52] Even if he gets under the leg, which is difficult, my knee is jammed under his thigh. See, like, with my knee being [05:34:00] under the thigh here, he tries to lift up, it's blocked. There's no way it's going to go through. If my knee is open like this, it's much more easy to pick that up. But here, he goes to [05:34:10] lift, and I just jam my knee further through, and that will solve that issue.

[05:34:15] If he does get under the the leg, then I want to have my [05:34:20] right foot under the armpit. So like we, like we've been doing, I use it as a knee shield to push his shoulder and take my knee back away. Okay. So go [05:34:30] hold the leg. I move my hips out and I drop. Okay. So he's got my knee here on my thigh. Move my hips away.[05:34:40]

[05:34:40] Even just to here. Now I've got access to step through. And open this space again. So I'm kind of like peeling this space open. He's underhooked my leg. [05:34:50] I'm going to start to open his arm out. Shoot through. And clear that space. So my knee can go back underneath. And he can't get under the leg again. I can continue to [05:35:00] attack.

[05:35:00] Ed reaches under my leg from standing. Often just by stepping on his torso. He tries to lift up. He's just pulling my foot into his body. Even just by [05:35:10] kicking. The end. If I kick my leg straight, it will strip his grip, okay, so, like that, strips the grip, I'm back on the hip.[05:35:20]

[05:35:22] If Ed goes to leg drag me, it's not too big of a deal, because I have my, my foot able to kick away, alright, but I still want to get my leg back, and it's hard to get [05:35:30] that leg back. while I'm side on like this, okay? So I'm gonna kick, but I need to spin towards north south. Then I can pummel this leg back.

[05:35:37] Here, he's gonna hold on to that, and that's gonna be an [05:35:40] issue, okay? Obviously, without the K guard leg, this would be really bad, but with my foot in the stomach, I'm safe. I wanna spin this way, and then I can start pummeling off that, [05:35:50] that arm, start to come back, and get into position, okay? So again, head goes to leg drag.

[05:35:55] First off, he shouldn't be able to actually, sorry, first off, Just by keeping my knee tight, alright? And I'm pummeling, alright? He [05:36:00] tries to leg drag, my knee's close to my chest, he can't pull that away. It's only if I've done something like extended that he can actually do that. Turn, kick and pull, [05:36:10] fight that grip off, pummel under the armpit, come back, and attack.[05:36:20]

[05:36:21] Ed sometimes might underhook this leg, okay? It's almost like a duck under, like he's trying to duck under, past the other side, or sometimes he even reaches, if he gets [05:36:30] that, don't let him reach this hand, through, uh, reach your right hand, left hand, yeah. Through here, this can be bad because it can open my leg up and he passes around this way.

[05:36:39] Okay [05:36:40] Just be wary if he ducks under this leg that you keep your inside leg low. This leg stays low So it's hard for him to get in this space. Now from here [05:36:50] I want to kick my right leg through to strip that grip. I hook the far side of his ribs Extend my leg. It will start to stretch his arm out. [05:37:00] Sorry, I submitted him there, but often the hand will just slip through.

[05:37:04] It can actually put pressure on the shoulder if you look from the side. Turn your head this way. So, [05:37:10] as he reaches under the leg, I move my hips away so I have space to pummel my legs through. I can't do it when I'm facing up. I can't get the legs through. But when [05:37:20] I use my Kegel hook to move out, I can pummel through, with my hips.

[05:37:24] Thread to the far shoulder and then extend his arm clear or his shoulder gets caught. [05:37:30] All

[05:37:36] right, so defending against foot locks. [05:37:40] Okay, first go from kneeling and then we can talk about standing. Now, really you should have your other leg ready to kick. Okay, so for example, we go [05:37:50] back. This is if I'm putting my, if I'm putting my Right leg across the hip here. I should have my other leg ready to kick against that.

[05:37:58] If I can kick the chest, [05:38:00] or even better, down near the hips, it stops Mish being able to put his hips into the football. Okay, so he's not going to be able to finish that. And I can really turn either way. I can turn [05:38:10] down to free my leg, or I can kick and twist this way to free my leg as well. Okay, so, if they go for the foot lock, just get your other foot [05:38:20] in contact to attack, right?

[05:38:22] Obviously, if we get through deep enough here, he doesn't really have enough purchase to be able to, you know, turn my foot all the way the other way. There's no danger of a straight [05:38:30] ankle lock. We talked about this a little earlier, but, obviously, my knee line is low and below the line of Mish's knee. So, I can't really have this leg attacked unless I do something [05:38:40] silly and lift my knee line above the line of his.

[05:38:43] hips where he could attack a heel hook or some sort of leg lock, but that shouldn't happen. I'm always keeping my knee underneath and he's trying to lift that [05:38:50] up. I just jam it underneath the leg. He can't do that. A lot of times people will attack our free leg, right here. I've got my key guard leg ready to step on [05:39:00] the, on the hip.

[05:39:02] So I'm here, Mish starts to attack this. I just step on the hip here. There's no way he's going to be able to apply enough pressure. [05:39:10] to stop me from push pull and freeing my leg, potentially twisting and continuing my attack from it. So you should, as long as you step this foot into the, [05:39:20] into the hips here, you don't really have to worry about that.

[05:39:22] It's the same for a toe hold. Okay. Some people will try to toe hold this leg. Okay. Just push pull. Right. There's no [05:39:30] way if I keep his hips away that he's actually going to be able to get anything with that toe hold. All right. So just always have your Kegel leg ready. to step on the stomach [05:39:40] near the hips.[05:39:50] [05:40:00] [05:40:10] [05:40:20]

[05:40:22] Countering crab ride entries, as we go to answer, often our opponent looks for some sort of invert or crab ride entry. So, [05:40:30] obviously you're dealing with a more advanced opponent if they're doing this, but you need to be ready to face an advanced opponent. So, the two main ways Mish might do it, is he [05:40:40] might jam his knee in this gap, and then Reach underneath my, my leg, and now he can start to come up in something like a leg drag or, or a crab break, okay.

[05:40:49] So, [05:40:50] I want to be able to block that one. Or he might step his foot through into this gap, and then fall and pummel into a crab break, okay. [05:41:00] So, So one thing you'll notice with these is, in both cases, Mish was able to get his arm underneath my free [05:41:10] leg here. Okay, I had space here for him to pummel this, right, so now if he, if he steps that foot through and he gets that, he's now got a hold of my hips and he's got a crab right.

[05:41:19] [05:41:20] If he drops his knee in and he gets underneath this leg, he's got the leg drag or potentially a crab right. [05:41:30] If you deny them control of this leg, they're going to really struggle to get these injuries. That's why I'm re, I'm. Talking a lot about pummeling [05:41:40] this leg and not swinging it wide. If I do this for my entry, I'm giving so many opportunities for him to counter me.

[05:41:46] If instead I'm pummeling to here, now if you [05:41:50] drop your knee in,

[05:41:53] He doesn't really have good positioning because my foot's on the outside. You might be looking thinking he's going to go for the heel hook. That's not going to [05:42:00] work. My foot's in the stomach. And I can start to get his leg across my foot. Okay, so generally Once you fall, look to take, just to win the [05:42:10] initial battle of the scramble, look to take the leg that you had K guard on across your body.

[05:42:15] Okay, now I'm winning this battle. Wherever he goes, he can't really have my back [05:42:20] if his leg is across the body. So if he starts getting back up, if I lose that battle and he gets up, I've 30 position. Okay, I can come up, I get [05:42:30] into something like a leg drag or from here, I can't stay down. Or from here, I can be looking to attack heel hooks, or my own [05:42:40] back take attempts as well.

[05:42:42] So look to take the leg across. Let's just look at that again. So if I pummel well, he probably won't even go [05:42:50] for it. Um, let's say he does win the pummel. Okay, yeah, I can go from here. Since, if you can manage to get the leg across your body, I [05:43:00] and grip onto it, then it's very hard for him to continue and progress.

[05:43:03] And I'll probably actually start to win the battle here, uh, for, for control and position. All right. [05:43:10] Uh, I should say sometimes, uh, for example, in that scenario where I lost the battle for my right leg, which falls, sometimes it's too far to pull it [05:43:20] across and you might have to go near side first. Okay. So this is often a good first control, but I want to be using my hook to feed it across eventually.

[05:43:29] Now I feel [05:43:30] safe. I feel like he's not going to have any immediate attacks on me. Now I can start to attack and counter attack against mish. If mish were to step inside, but I don't [05:43:40] poel my foot. Say I have palm on my leg to the inside instead of his arm, so his arm under my leg. This is no good. If my foot's on the inside here, then [05:43:50] I'm starting to win this battle again.

[05:43:51] Okay? So from here I can be using that to start to to attack. And. Uh, and get the, ahead of these sort of scrambles [05:44:00] towards the back. Alright, if you allow them underneath this leg, this is going to give you some real problems. Okay, so when I'm going for key guard, I don't allow this. Alright, go back. [05:44:10] I want to be actively pummeling inside.

[05:44:14] Okay, he's looking to do that now. And I'm pummeling inside the arm and in front of the armpit here. Then [05:44:20] try to put your foot in. It's not such a good position for me to get. I can look to the counter against it. [05:44:30] Mhm. Mhm. [05:44:40] Mhm. Mhm.[05:44:50] [05:45:00] [05:45:10] [05:45:20] [05:45:30] [05:45:40] [05:45:50] [05:46:00] [05:46:10] [05:46:20] [05:46:30] [05:46:40] [05:46:50] [05:47:00] [05:47:10] [05:47:20] [05:47:30] [05:47:40] [05:47:50] [05:48:00] [05:48:10] [05:48:20] [05:48:30] [05:48:40] [05:48:50] [05:49:00] [05:49:10] [05:49:20] [05:49:30] [05:49:40] [05:49:50] [05:50:00] [05:50:10] [05:50:20] [05:50:30] [05:50:40] [05:50:50] [05:51:00] [05:51:10] [05:51:20] [05:51:30] [05:51:40] [05:51:50] [05:52:00]

[05:52:06] Speaker 20: Alright, so I'm going through offense now and first just looking at [05:52:10] some, um, different ways of getting the knee up onto the stomach and, or at least some, some live examples of that. So in this one, [05:52:20] see the knees already almost in position, but I think I actually kick back or actually I, uh, that kind of extension through this [05:52:30] left leg, pushing away, making, making more distance with the hips as I pull the hands up.

[05:52:37] Should get the knee up. Okay, and actually I feed the leg [05:52:40] across or and it actually ends up in a Delahevo scenario, which is, which is okay, not the ideal scenario, but looking at that again, [05:52:50] gripping the leg and making sure I extend the hips up and away with my leg as I pull with my hands. There we go, with the knee locked in behind the [05:53:00] hips being very important as we do this.

[05:53:05] Another one this time against someone who's, um, [05:53:10] keeping their weight back, and even just, just pummeling the leg and making them, trying to, as they're trying to hold onto the leg, often this leg I'm gripping onto becomes light, and I'm able [05:53:20] to, um, kind of use this light off balance to, to get the knee up.

[05:53:25] So working very hard with the hands, and obviously that outside foot assisting as well.[05:53:30]

[05:53:33] This was a good example of you can see how much the top leg can assist as well by pushing on the weight. So having [05:53:40] that foot tucked into the armpit, pushing with that leg and then making enough distance with that that I can actually start pulling the knee now up onto my, to my [05:53:50] chest where I want. Okay.

[05:53:51] And this is obviously into a 50 50 entry. I think this is a good one to illustrate [05:54:00] that you want to get pressure on the hip. So here. Sean's popped his, Sean's a good black belt, he's popped his hips forward and it's very hard for me to use my left leg [05:54:10] now to generate that pressure on the hips I want. So I'm going to take my right leg and step on his hip to help generate pressure.

[05:54:16] So you see I'll step on his hip and or stomach and [05:54:20] pushing away with that and you'll see how that lifts the knee. There we go, okay. So by pushing that's lifted the knee and we ended up in a bit of a scramble there. And another [05:54:30] person I was rolling with at a seminar who was very good at keeping his hips low.

[05:54:33] So I had to work quite hard at this one. So you can see that top leg just coming in to assist actually pushed [05:54:40] with my knee of that top leg. So I'm kind of working to get my hands together, trying to pummel this right leg in. There we are. And now [05:54:50] my knee can. Assist there we go and that just getting those hips up you can see I'm stepping on the stomach with that inside leg Which you can definitely use to push as well Okay, and now the knees up on the stomach [05:55:00] that gives us a chance to set up our our attacks we want Now just talking about retracting one leg and And extending the other.

[05:55:09] So we [05:55:10] always want, we're trying to connect to their hips if we can with their legs. So you can see here, it's actually not K guard. I've got my left leg attached to my right leg peeled back because this one's been peeled off and now [05:55:20] retract this and put this one in. So just the idea of having one leg in and the other one not.

[05:55:25] So, and then I change it. Change it up a bit. Good. And then, [05:55:30] that lets me get in now, which we'll talk about a bit later, about how to get into attack. Alright, so we'll look at some actual offense now, now that we know how to get the knee to [05:55:40] the stomach. So, to backside 50 50, this is a backside 50 50 entry.

[05:55:44] Um, my opponent backsteps, we're going to talk a little more about that later, but Now obviously with the [05:55:50] knee turning in, a good time to go towards backside 50 50 is when your opponent's knee faces inwards like that. Okay, they're giving you the backside of their knee available, so [05:56:00] it's a good time to shoot your foot through the gap into a 50 50, or really a 90 10 or outside Senkaku positioning there.

[05:56:09] Here's another [05:56:10] example, where, in this one, I guess the the low hips and the ability, I could feel I could [05:56:20] swing my leg up and there's a big, I could see this gap between the, um, the hips and the foot. I could chop my leg through. So again, if you can see that window towards the back, if you can [05:56:30] just sense that that's available, you should be, or you definitely have the option to scoot your foot through.

[05:56:34] And now I'm in the 50 50 or backside 50 50 position now.[05:56:40]

[05:56:49] Now look at [05:56:50] when you lose the knee from backside 50 50. Actually, there's a few things you can do. I don't have footage on this of where I try to regain the knee line. You can check the ADCC match with [05:57:00] Muhammad Ali, for example, for how I do that. But, you've also got the option to go to crab right. So, you can see the knee's lost.

[05:57:07] I was actually kind of feeding it because I wanted to [05:57:10] work this. But, I can pummel my leg behind. So, The shin here, so I'm going to work behind this shin. So you can see my knee go behind that shin in a moment. There we [05:57:20] go. As I retract my leg, and this gives me the crab ride position. Alright, so let's now look at the actual, when our opponent backs.

[05:57:29] So as we go to [05:57:30] backside 50 50, they keep backstepping, okay? And I talked about this, but following with my knee free. So it's really important. I mean, you could try to end up in [05:57:40] 50 50 in this scenario. You could just feed your leg through and consolidate at 50 50, but it's better if you actually keep, so you see my left leg, it's basically in front of the stomach because I know he's [05:57:50] backstepping.

[05:57:50] I'm going to keep my foot in the stomach and my knee is well clear. So I've got his knee trapped and my knee is free. See that? So my knee is free. His is trapped [05:58:00] and I can reap across and this puts us in that 90 10 outside Senkaku position. So just following and keeping your knee free and retracting and turning with them being really [05:58:10] important.

[05:58:11] Alright, another offensive option going K guard to X guard. So we're looking at this same clip again, but now you'll see I'm gonna take my, I believe my right leg and shoot it to the calf to get my [05:58:20] hips from one side. So you can see my hips are facing, my hips are out. to the left of my opponent. I want to get them to the right of my opponent.

[05:58:28] And I also want to face from [05:58:30] my right to my left. So everything's going to switch over. So I'm going to chop. I'm going to chop the back of the calf in a moment. As I realize it's hard to get back into the, so this is really [05:58:40] because it was hard to get access to the hips. He's blocking that. Okay. I'm going to go underneath to the legs.

[05:58:44] I'm going to chop the back of the calf and I bring my hips. See my hips now facing On, [05:58:50] on this side, well, as much as I can, on this side of David, and I'm facing my left now, and this should be able to knock his hands down towards the mat. There we are, well, [05:59:00] it was cut off beforehand, but Alright, 70 30 inches, well, I've really, I've gone K Guard and Steve's actually sat down, I end up doing like a, well, really a 50 50 entry on, [05:59:10] um On this other leg.

[05:59:12] Okay. But you can see, so I've fed the leg across just like I would when I'm going towards 70 30. And then I think Steve pummels his [05:59:20] right foot in here and end up taking this right leg. So he's put that in and actually pull that through. So now you can see we've got this kind of, um, leg entanglement here.

[05:59:29] All [05:59:30] right. Another one. So knees on the stomach, I'm reaching to the foot. It looks like I'll be taking that across body. Yeah, okay. And a lot of the [05:59:40] time when that happens, they retract their foot. We'll talk about that a bit later. Uh, it does give us a chance to, to bare and bowler.[05:59:50]

[05:59:52] This is a K guard entry off retention. There we go. And actually the leg just comes across. He actually steps it over [06:00:00] into the 70 30 position, which basically becomes like a 70 30 all the way on this side. All right. I'll have a look at [06:00:10] some shallow K guard now, um, in terms of offense. So again, I have the option from shallow K to go back in [06:00:20] towards, I got three options really.

[06:00:22] I can, um, try to, I can try to turn the knee inwards [06:00:30] and chop through to backside 50 50, which is actually what I try to do here, but I don't think it was the best option. Um, sometimes you can roll all the way through and get into 70 30 like we did [06:00:40] from, um, from a standing backside 50 50 entry, that's definitely an option.

[06:00:45] Um, you could potentially shoot your leg back up into a regular K guard [06:00:50] or you could actually chop back into X guard like we talked about earlier. So here I try to shoot over the gap, but he actually turned, David turns [06:01:00] his knee out. This is not the best position to be in now. There's a chance I could actually get counted here, but I managed to keep what I've managed to do well is take my [06:01:10] left leg across the hip.

[06:01:12] So as I shoot my right leg over, watch this left leg, it comes across the hip and that will actually set me up to roll back under to K Guard. [06:01:20] So I bail on this because I see that this could be a threatening position. I roll back and because this one's across the hip, my left leg, it comes into actually a K Guard, a regular K Guard [06:01:30] entry.

[06:01:30] So I've kind of deepened the position. Here's a, again a, Shallow K guard [06:01:40] entry, so we talk about the entry a lot more, well more in the um, Delaheva section because it's really off Delaheva. It's a Delaheva move to enter here. So I've basically [06:01:50] done everything you need to do for the entry, but I don't actually go into shallow K.

[06:01:53] I actually just shoot to a leg entanglement, which again, I probably wouldn't do, wouldn't recommend this. This is a potential [06:02:00] for, for a counter. So, um, here we can I mean, I do manage to get onto the leg and get into a leg entanglement, but [06:02:10] that wasn't ideal. Here's a good actual 50 50 or backside 50 50 entry from it, I believe.

[06:02:16] So we'll just pass to there. So I get my hips [06:02:20] out. I get the shallow K. I try to get the shallow K position. Oh, yeah. Um, there we go. Okay. So from here [06:02:30] now I have good positioning. So my, my foot's going to turn the knee inwards and my grip. is really holding on. So can you [06:02:40] see how I'm ready for my opponent Locky to try to run?

[06:02:43] I'm really tight. Look at this, how tight I'm pulling in. So if he tried to pull and run, it'd be very difficult. You can see [06:02:50] how much I'm pulling my forearm towards my chest here, locking that foot in so it couldn't disengage. Okay. And ideally my foot's a bit higher up, but he's actually pushed my foot down.

[06:02:59] So it's a bit lower [06:03:00] than the knee line and then I can chop behind. And because of my grip, even though the knee's free. It's going to be hard to run because I've got such a tight grip on the leg. Okay. Now I can kick my left leg [06:03:10] out. I should be able to, Oh, yes, she, he stands up. Okay. So I go back to just a 50, 50 entry.

[06:03:16] Okay. All right. Just [06:03:20] quickly, we'll talk about something we did in the troubleshooting section. So if you lose the leg. You pass the leg across from K guard, you lose it. It's actually, you're basically got De La Hiva and you're halfway through the Barambola. So [06:03:30] we're now at stage three or phase three of our Barambola in the, that we cover in the De La Hiva series.

[06:03:36] The hips are on the mat and we can attack. Now here I managed to pull the [06:03:40] leg back across. So I kind of lost the leg. I scoot in and I pull it back across and caught the heel in one action. And there's another example here. [06:03:50] So, I go to pass the leg across, and it ends up between my legs, and that's actually okay, we can go straight into the bolo.

[06:03:56] So I feed it to my left hand, my right hand goes behind the [06:04:00] shoulder, and I can roll my hips through, and there we are. Hips come in, and into the bolo wedge.[06:04:10]

[06:04:10] Lastly, defending foot locks. Okay, so, so, we've got two examples, both are actually from an open guard, so. I think I talk [06:04:20] about these a little bit in the De La Riva section as well, but got my feet open. So people are going to sit back on your legs. Okay, so my opponent sits in at the [06:04:30] leg and you see I've already pummeled my other foot in front of the hip, right?

[06:04:34] That's going to stop any bridging as we talked about. Okay, so my foot's blocking the hip from [06:04:40] coming in and then see his foot disconnect from his hip. This gives me room actually to now change it to Riva hook, which is even stronger. So I'm going to push in front of the hip [06:04:50] again, but this time with a De La Riva hook.

[06:04:51] So over the top's good, but even better if you can come underneath. Okay, there we are. Now I've come underneath. I've got a good access to the Barambola.[06:05:00]

[06:05:02] Another one here from Open Guard. My opponent's going to sit in on the leg. I'm going to do the same thing. I'm going to pummel my left foot, my other [06:05:10] leg in front of the hip. Look at that, okay. Kicking, stomping down right into the hip, stopping any bridging power. I need to now use my hands to clear [06:05:20] this leg.

[06:05:22] Notice it's my right arm. So I can be up on my left and moving my hips. Once I clear his foot, [06:05:30] Oh, actually he's kind of starting to give up, but Okay, now I'm past the line of the foot, so That lets me spin to the

[06:05:38] So I kind of feel like, Okay, [06:05:40] He lost some control of that foot and now I get a chance with my De La Riva hook to spin over. So actually I wasn't even talking about that but at some point I pummeled from over [06:05:50] again. As they're trying to adjust they often extend and it lets you go under for De La Riva.

[06:05:54] Okay, and so I've taken my foot out and this time I've gone under. See that De La Riva hook now and this [06:06:00] is going to really kill it. As long as he can't step on my hip I can roll through towards the Barambola making sure I want to clear this knee line. [06:06:10] Alright, so that's it for key guard offense. [06:06:20] [06:06:30] Yeah.[06:06:40] [06:06:50] [06:07:00] [06:07:10] [06:07:20] [06:07:30] [06:07:40] [06:07:50] [06:08:00] [06:08:10] [06:08:20] [06:08:30] [06:08:40] [06:08:50] [06:09:00] [06:09:10] [06:09:20] [06:09:30] [06:09:40] [06:09:50] [06:10:00]

[06:10:04] Speaker 19: [06:10:10] [06:10:20] Um,[06:10:30] [06:10:40] [06:10:50] [06:11:00] [06:11:10] [06:11:20] [06:11:30] [06:11:40] [06:11:50] [06:12:00] [06:12:10] [06:12:20] [06:12:30] [06:12:40] [06:12:50] [06:13:00] [06:13:10] [06:13:20] [06:13:30] [06:13:40] [06:13:50] [06:14:00] [06:14:10]

[06:14:13] [06:14:20] [06:14:30] Um,[06:14:40] [06:14:50] [06:15:00] [06:15:10] [06:15:20] [06:15:30] [06:15:40] [06:15:50] [06:16:00] [06:16:10] [06:16:20] [06:16:30] [06:16:40] [06:16:50] [06:17:00] [06:17:10] [06:17:20] [06:17:30] [06:17:40] [06:17:50]

[06:17:56] [06:18:00] [06:18:10] [06:18:20] [06:18:30] [06:18:40] [06:18:50] [06:19:00] [06:19:10] [06:19:20] [06:19:30] [06:19:40] [06:19:50] [06:20:00] [06:20:10] [06:20:20] [06:20:30] [06:20:40] [06:20:50] [06:21:00] [06:21:10] [06:21:20] Yeah.

Jl Less Impressed More InvolvedTemplate